JP2021094065A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: A specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image differing from the first specific image, a ratio of control to an advantageous state differs between when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed, and a control period of a movable body by performance execution means differs from an update period of the specific image and an effect image, thus further highlighting enlarged display of the specific image and performance operation of the movable body by the effect image, and hence enhancing interest in a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-31

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In the conventional gaming machine, the effect result can be notified by the operation of the movable body (effect operation), and when the movable body operates, the effect image (effect image) is displayed on the image display unit to move the machine. Some emphasize the movement of the body (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-99572

However, in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the game entertainment cannot be improved because the effect image is only displayed on the image display unit when the movable body is produced.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when the specific effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, FIG. 10-32 to FIG. 10-35). As described above, while the moving body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosive effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. The part that displays),
While executing the suggestion effect, the specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of the super reach β1. If so, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed, and the part where the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed, and the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β2. The part that is displayed and the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device during the enlarged display period. 5), the part displaying the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is different. The update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms, whereas it is 1 ms).
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display differs between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlargement). The part where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestion effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlarged display period and the second 2 The part where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same during the enlarged display period),
further,
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the effecting motion of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.
In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention according to the following means 1. Conventionally, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-147575 in a gaming machine, a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game to a state in which a jackpot game can be executed based on the fact that seven symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed in a decorative symbol display device. Is disclosed.

According to the above-mentioned gaming machine, during the execution of the jackpot start effect, the player is configured to give a right-handed instruction to urge the player to launch the gaming ball to the right by operating the ball launching handle. There was still room for improvement in the instruction to urge the player to launch the game ball in such a predetermined direction.

It was conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably executing an instruction for urging a player to launch a gaming ball in a predetermined direction.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
It is characterized in that the second guidance display is continued in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.
According to this feature, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, and has a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a schematic diagram of a movable body unit. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. It is a figure which illustrates the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a variable display result and a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing a configuration example of an effect control data holding area, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a start winning command buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the random value value determination processing at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the read-ahead notice setting process. It is a figure which shows whether or not the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the determination ratio of a display pattern. It is a figure which shows the update example of the 1st hold storage display area and the 2nd hold storage display area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is explanatory drawing of the variable display control timer and the movable body control timer. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach α1 jackpot and super reach α2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach α1 off and the super reach α2 off. It is a timing chart in the variable display of super reach β1 jackpot and super reach β2 jackpot. It is a timing chart in the variable display of the super reach β1 off and the super reach β2 off. It is a figure which shows the presence / absence of the movable body suggestion movement, and the image magnification ratio in each enlarged display period. (A) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion suggestion effect, and (B) is a figure which shows the effect mode of each movable body motion effect. It is a figure which shows the effect mode up to the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in an image display device. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a figure which shows the effect mode of the reach effect in the image display device in the modification. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the characteristic part of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the frame lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the special figure LED board and the 4th symbol unit. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of the image display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hit type table. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the big hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing during jackpot opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process after opening a big hit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing during hit fluctuation. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing in a big hit. It is a timing chart which shows an example of processing after the end of a big hit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the lighting mode of a lamp. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the parent table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the child table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the grandchild table in the lighting data table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine during a game. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine when it recovers from the electric power cutoff during the fanfare production by hitting special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during one round of big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when returning from a power failure during a round after one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting a special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 2 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting a special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during the round after 3 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting a special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from the electric power cutoff during 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when returning from a power failure during a round after 4 rounds of a big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the production mode of the pachinko game machine at the time of returning from a power failure during the final round of a big hit at the time of hitting special figure 1. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when returning from a power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

[form]
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when the specific effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, FIG. 10-32 to FIG. 10-35). As described above, while the moving body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosive effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. The part that displays),
While executing the suggestion effect, the specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of the super reach β1. If so, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed, and the part where the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed, and the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β2. The part that is displayed and the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device during the enlarged display period. 5), the part displaying the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is different. The update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms, whereas it is 1 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the effecting motion of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display differs between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlargement). The part where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestion effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlarged display period and the second 2 The part where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same during the enlarged display period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the effect of magnifying the display and reduce the control load related to the operation of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the third form is the gaming machine according to the first or second form.
After the second timing, the non-expansion period in which the specific image is not enlarged (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start of the movable body movement effect or the detachment notification effect from the end timing of the enlargement display period). Has a period until timing)
The display mode in the non-expansion period is different from the display mode immediately before the non-expansion period (for example, as a modification 109SG-2, after the end of the enlargement display period, the image display device 5 displays a specific effect or an effect image. By displaying, etc., the part that differs from the image display mode on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it can be easily recognized that it is a non-expansion period.

The gaming machine of the fourth form is the gaming machine according to the second or third form.
The effect executing means can gradually enlarge and display the specific image even after the repetitive operation of the movable body is completed (for example, in the third enlarged display period shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24). Enlarged display),
The enlargement speed of the second timing is slower than the enlargement speed of the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the second enlargement display period is longer than the first enlargement display period. Slow speed part),
The magnifying speed of the magnified display after the repetitive operation of the movable body is completed is slower than the magnifying speed of the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24). 3 The enlarged display period is the part where the enlargement speed is slower than the second enlarged display period)
According to this feature, even if the repetitive movement of the movable body is completed, the enlarged display of the specific image is continued, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the fifth form is the gaming machine according to the first to fourth forms.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to execute a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect) for notifying that the control is in an advantageous state.
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the look-ahead advance notice effect is displayed during the reach effect including the enlarged display period. Part that limits execution)
The gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player's attention to the specific image from being lowered due to the execution of the advance notice effect.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first to fifth aspects.
In the effect executing means, the visibility of the specific image differs between when the movable body is operated in the suggested effect and when the movable body is operated in the specific effect (for example, FIGS. 10-32 and 10-). As shown in FIG. 34, the player can visually recognize the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body operation effect B is being executed. Is a portion where the visibility of the reach effect is reduced due to the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the visibility of the specific image changes according to the operating state of the movable body, it is possible to easily understand whether it is the motion of the suggestion effect or the operation of the specific effect, and the movable body and the specific image can be understood. You can adjust the degree of attention of.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first to sixth embodiments.
The effect executing means can display a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, as in the modified example 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, the movable body The part that can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement and the effect image according to the progress of the battle production),
The size of the first effect image and the size of the second effect image are different (for example, as a modification 109SG-3, an explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of a movable body and an effect image according to the progress of a battle effect are used. Parts of different sizes)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movable body and the specific image.

The gaming machine of the eighth form is the gaming machine according to the first to seventh forms.
The effect executing means can display a first effect image for the movable body and a second effect image for the specific image (for example, as in the modified example 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, the movable body The part that can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement and the effect image according to the progress of the battle production),
The image transparency of the first effect image and the image transparency of the second effect image are different (for example, as a modification 109SG-3, the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement of the movable body and the progress of the battle effect The part that makes the image transparency different from the corresponding effect image)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to display an effect image having appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movable body and the specific image.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the specific effect is being executed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, if the reach effect of the super reach β1 is being performed, the ally character B and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed),
The operation of the movable body in the suggested effect is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23) before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific effect. The part where the movable body motion suggestion effect ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion effect),
Before and after the predetermined period, different types of sound effects can be output (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, the speakers 8L, 8R to BGM. , SE, while outputting the motion suggestion sound, the part that outputs BGM, SE, jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L, 8R during the execution of the movable body motion effect),
There are fewer types of production sounds during the predetermined period than the types of production sounds that were output immediately before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, during the period T3). Is the part where only SE is output from the speakers 8L and 8R),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the type of effect sound changes before and after a predetermined period in which the movable body does not operate.

The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the specific effect is being executed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, if the reach effect of the super reach β1 is being performed, the ally character B and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed),
The operation of the movable body in the suggested effect is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23) before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific effect. The part where the movable body motion suggestion effect ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion effect),
The predetermined period is a period longer than the execution period of one unit operation in which the movable body is repeatedly operated, and is shorter than the period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. 10). As shown in -21 to FIG. 10-24, the period T3 is a portion longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401).
The operating period of the movable body in the specific effect is longer than the period in which the movable body is repeatedly operated in the suggested effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is , The part that is shorter than the period T2 for executing the movable body movement suggestion effect),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the motion in the specific effect from being mistaken for the motion in the suggestion effect, and the period of suggestion becomes longer than the operation period of the movable body in the specific effect of the suggestion target. It is also possible to prevent a decline in interest due to this.

The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the specific effect is being executed, a specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, if the reach effect of the super reach β1 is being performed, the ally character B and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed),
The operation of the movable body in the suggested effect is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23) before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific effect. The part where the movable body motion suggestion effect ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion effect),
During the predetermined period, at least the first low visibility state in which the visibility of the background image is low (for example, as the modified example 109SG-4, the movable body movement suggestion effect and the enlarged display period are completed, and then the movable body operation effect or the disconnection notification is given. In the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness in the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period).
When the movable body is started to operate after the predetermined period, the second low visibility state is set to a lower visibility than the first low visibility state (for example, as the modified example 109SG04, the contrast and brightness in the image display device 5 are set. Is a portion that further reduces the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character by changing from the first low visibility state to the second low visibility state).
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the period is a predetermined period, and it is possible to raise attention to the movement of the movable body in the specific effect.

The gaming machine according to the morphology 12
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
The specific image can be displayed when the specific effect is being executed and when the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image can be gradually enlarged and displayed during the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β1, and the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed. And, if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed, and these ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
The operation of the movable body in the suggested effect is terminated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23) before the timing at which the movable body is started to operate in the specific effect. The part where the movable body motion suggestion effect ends before the period T3 before the start of the motion effect),
The movement of the movable body is started before the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in the modified example 109SG-1, the movable body is movable from a timing before the enlarged display of the ally character and the enemy character is started. The part that executes the body movement suggestion effect),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the period is a predetermined period, and it is possible to increase the attention to the repetitive movement of the movable body in the suggestion effect.

The gaming machine according to the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the ninth to the twelfth forms.
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, movable body LED109SG495).
The effect executing means controls the light emitting unit to a non-light emitting state during the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the movable body operation effect or the movable body operation effect is performed from the end of the third enlarged display period. The part where the movable body LED109SG495 is turned off during the period until the start of the disconnection notification effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable body is not operating for a predetermined period of time.

The gaming machine of the 14th form is the gaming machine according to the 1st to 13th forms.
The movable body is a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 109SG401) and a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 109SG402L and a third movable body 109SG402R) that can operate independently of the first movable body. Including and
The effect executing means is
In the repetitive operation of the suggestion effect, only one of the first movable body and the second movable body is operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the movable body motion suggestion effect B Then, the part that operates only the first movable body 109SG401),
In the operation of the specific effect, both the first movable body and the second movable body are operated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, in the movable body operation effect B, the second movable body is operated. 1 Movable body 109SG401, 2nd movable body 109SG402L, 3rd movable body 109SG402R)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily distinguish whether the movement of the movable body is the movement of the suggestion effect or the operation of the specific effect.

The gaming machine of the 15th form is the gaming machine according to the 1st to 14th forms.
The movable body has a light emitting unit capable of emitting light (for example, movable body LED109SG495).
The effect executing means is
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the light emitting unit is made to emit light at the first brightness (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlarged display period, the second In the enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1).
In the specific effect, at least during the period when the effect result is notified, the light emitting unit is made to emit light at a second brightness higher than the first brightness (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23). , The part that causes the movable body LED109SG495 to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1 during the execution of the movable body operation effect)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it becomes easy to recognize that it is a period in which the production result is shown, and at the same time, the interest of the period can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 16 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
The specific image can be displayed when the specific effect is being executed and when the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image can be gradually enlarged and displayed during the execution of the suggestion effect (for example, FIG. As shown in 10-32 and FIG. 10-34, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β1, and the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed. And, if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed, and these ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed).
When the movable body is operated in the suggested effect, it is possible to display a different type of effect image from the effect image displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect (for example,). , As a modification 109SG-5, a portion in which different effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 between the execution of the movable body motion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect).
In the suggestion effect, the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated is larger than the number of types of effect images displayed when the movable body is operated in the specific effect. (For example, as a modification 109SG-5, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion effect. More than the number of types of production images to be produced),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, many kinds of effect images are displayed at the time of suggestion effect in which the operation is repeated, so that the interest at the time of suggestion effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of form 17 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the suggestion effect, it is possible to display an image corresponding to the suggestion motion corresponding to the motion of the movable body (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, during the execution of the motion suggestion effect of the movable body, the movable body 5 is displayed. Movable body corresponding to motion suggestion effect (the part that displays the image corresponding to motion suggestion effect),
In the specific effect, it is possible to display an image corresponding to the effect operation corresponding to the operation of the movable body (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body operation effect, the image display device 5 can display the movable body operation. As an image corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the effect, a part displaying an image different from the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect),
The period during which the suggested motion-corresponding image is displayed is different from the period during which the effect motion-corresponding image is displayed (for example, as the modified example 109SG-6, the display period of the movable body motion suggestion-supported image and the movable body motion-directed corresponding The part that makes the image display period different),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display period of the suggestion motion-corresponding image and the staging motion-corresponding image can be set to the period corresponding to each motion of the movable body.

The gaming machine of the 18th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 17th embodiment.
When displaying the effect operation compatible image, the effect execution means controls the image to a low visibility state in which the visibility is lowered (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, the movable body operation effect compatible image is displayed in the image display device 5). When displaying, the portion that reduces the visibility of the image corresponding to the motion effect of the movable body by lowering the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the movable body that operates in a specific effect.

The gaming machine of the 19th form is the gaming machine according to the 17th form or the 18th form.
The effect executing means is
During the period of displaying the suggested motion-corresponding image, the suggested motion-corresponding sound corresponding to the suggested motion-corresponding image can be output (for example, as a modification 109SG-6, the movable body motion suggestion effect-corresponding image in the image display device 5). Is displayed, the speaker 8L8R outputs the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding image),
During the period of displaying the effect operation compatible image, it is possible to output an effect sound corresponding to the effect operation compatible image, which is different from the suggestion operation compatible sound (for example, as a modification 109SG-6). When displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect on the image display device 5, the part that outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect from the speaker 8L8R)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to output a sound corresponding to each corresponding image to be displayed.

The gaming machine of the 20th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 17th to 19th forms.
The effect executing means is characterized in that the effect corresponding image is displayed before the operation start timing of the movable body in the specific effect.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the expectation that the movement of the movable body in the specific effect is started, and also to raise the attention to the movement of the movable body.

The gaming machine of form 21 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body, and a special image is displayed before the specific effect is executed to operate the movable body. Suggestive effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed without any effect (for example, in the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the movable body 109SG401 at speed V1). The body motion suggestion effect A), the effect execution means capable of executing the effect (for example, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10-19), and
With
The effect executing means is
In the suggestion effect, the special image is displayed in a manner of approaching the movable body at the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, , A portion of the image display device 5 in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1).
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in a mode of being separated from the movable body at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31). When the body motion effect A is executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Part),
During the display period of the special image, at least the background image is displayed in a low visibility state with low visibility (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed. Is the part where the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B are displayed with lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
A specific image can be displayed while the specific effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, if the reach effect of the super reach α1 is being performed, the ally character A and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach α2 is being produced, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special image can be made to stand out, and the movable body can be focused on by moving the special image, so that the effect of the movement of the movable body can be enhanced, thereby improving the game entertainment. it can.

The gaming machine of form 22 is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and a specific effect that gradually approaches the movable body at a first speed before the specific effect is executed. By displaying a special image, a suggestion effect suggesting that the specific effect is executed without operating the movable body (for example, in the image display device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at a speed V1 The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) that can execute the movable body motion suggestion effect A that moves toward the movable body 109SG401 at the speed V1 (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. Part) and
With
The effect executing means is
In the suggestion effect, the special image is displayed in a mode of repeatedly acting at the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the image is displayed. In the device 5, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1).
In the specific effect, the special image is displayed in a mode of being separated from the movable body at a second speed faster than the first speed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31). When the body motion effect A is executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. Part),
During the display period of the special image, the effect images other than the special image are displayed in a low visibility state with low visibility (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the movable body motion suggestion effect. During the execution of A, the image of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B is displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period),
A specific image can be displayed while the specific effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, if the reach effect of the super reach α1 is being performed, the ally character A and the enemy Character A is displayed, and if the reach of Super Reach β2 is being produced, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the special image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is 1 ms. On the other hand, the update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the special image can be made to stand out, and the movable body can be focused on by moving the special image, so that the effect of the movement of the movable body can be enhanced, thereby improving the game entertainment. it can.

The gaming machine of the 23rd form is the gaming machine according to the 21st or 22nd form.
The effect executing means hides the special image during a predetermined period immediately before the operation start timing of the movable body in the specific effect (as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F)). In addition, the part where the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is not displayed on the image display device 5 before the execution of the movable body motion effect A or the detachment notification effect).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the movement of the movable body is started by hiding the special image.

The gaming machine of the 24th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 21st to 23rd forms.
The first speed is a speed in a predetermined range, and the first speed changes according to the proximity of the special image within the predetermined range (for example, as shown in the modification 109SG-7, the speed V1 is predetermined. (Variable part within the range of),
The second speed is a speed faster than the maximum speed in the predetermined range (for example, as shown in the modified example 109SG-7, the speed of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the time of executing the movable body motion effect A. For V2, the part that is faster than the maximum speed of speed V1)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the moving speed of the special image is changed, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 21st to 24th forms.
The effect executing means is
It is possible to output a plurality of operation sound effects corresponding to the repetitive operation of the movable body or the operation of the special image (for example, 0 multiple sounds are output as operation suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Possible part),
It is possible to output different operation sound effects according to the output timing (for example, multiple output start timings of the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound are provided, and at which timing the output of the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound is started. The part that can output different sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R according to
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize that the repetitive motion of the movable body or the motion of the special image is being executed, and the motion sound effect changes according to the output timing, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. The total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as the total reserved storage number.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening that is always kept in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, so that the tip of the movable wing pieces is in a vertical position. Is close to the winning ball device 6A and is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening is closed). On the other hand, the variable-sweep wing device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening because the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is on (second start). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to the one provided with an electric tulip type accessory.

A predetermined ball receiving member always keeps a constant open state at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three places on the lower left of the game area and one place on the upper side of the variable winning ball device 6B). A general winning opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal pattern game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

A normal symbol display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The normal figure hold display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the game area. Further, an attacker lamp 9c is provided in the vicinity of the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (upper position of the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area by the striking ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, the gaming balls paid out as prize balls and the gaming balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) A hit ball supply plate (upper plate) is provided. In addition to the upper plate, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout portion (ball hitting plate) on which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. On the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as a jackpot winning probability and a ball output rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11 such as a predetermined position of the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured by using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is visually recognized with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as a continuous ratio, a combination ratio, and a base. The ream ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning a prize to the big prize opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The role ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls by winning the second starting winning opening (Denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning the big winning opening (attacker) to the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. The display monitor 29 can display the set value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. The display monitor 29 may be capable of displaying a setting value or the like to be changed or confirmed when the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. A glass door frame 3a having a glass window is rotatably provided in the game machine frame 3, and the game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of an outer frame 1a formed in a vertically long square frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side portion of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back surface side. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if the normal symbol other than the normal symbol (the normal symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined mode. The open state includes the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until the earlier timing. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the large winning opening can be opened in one round, and is also hereinafter referred to as an opening upper limit period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is open in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until the maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and open upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc.) are prepared, and the big hit type is set according to these. Has been done. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls are obtained, or a jackpot type in which almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening becomes open. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, the time saving state is also called the low accuracy high base state, the probability variation state is called the high accuracy high base state, and the normal state is also called the low accuracy low base state. The high accuracy state and the low base state are also called the high accuracy low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there may be no "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability change symbol becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability change jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," "is a predetermined small hit combination as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5. 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution, and a pre-reading advance notice effect that announces the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state having the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a high accuracy state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Furthermore, the power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are configured so that not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which a conductor pattern is formed and electric components can be mounted, but also electric components are mounted on the electronic circuit boards to realize specific electrical functions. It is a concept including the electronic circuit mounting board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, electric power from an AC power source such as AC100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as a main board 11 and an effect control board 12 by a power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifying circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage to a specific direct current voltage (for example, direct current 12V, direct current 5V, etc.), and the like. I have.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The reset signal, power cutoff signal, and clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for putting a control circuit such as a game control microcomputer 100 into an operation stop state, and can be output by using any of a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, and a system reset IC. All you need is. The power off signal is turned off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and is turned on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage is below the predetermined value continues for the power interruption reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output sound) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. When such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data may be stored in RAM 102, which is a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, and the like may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether or not the recovery conditions can be satisfied.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the recovery process (step S4) is executed, and then the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed. By the recovery process in step S4, the work area is set based on the stored contents of the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped. For example, when the special symbol is changing, the state before the stop is special. It suffices if the fluctuation of the symbol can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), the setting change process (step S7) is executed after the initialization process (step S6) is executed. The initialization process of step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the initial value is set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting confirmation condition is satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including the fact that the clear signal is in the off state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the off state, the fact that the clear signal is in the off state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state in which the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed is set, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is terminated, the setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in the gaming stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. When the game is stopped, the launch of the game ball by the operation of the hitting ball operation handle, the detection of the game ball by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled so that the lost symbol or the like is stopped and displayed, or the display corresponding to the game stopped state different from the lost symbol is displayed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether or not the predetermined setting change condition is satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when the power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is satisfied in the setting change process of step S7, the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed to the setting change state, and the setting is set from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. A change start command is sent. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and each time the operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected, the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed. After that, based on the fact that the setting key 51 is turned off by an operation by a staff member of the amusement park or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is stored. Turns off. When the setting change state is terminated, the setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be in the game stop state as in the case of the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the game stop state that accompanies this may also end.

When the effect control board 12 side receives the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, the control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be made to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the detection signal from the door opening sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on when the power supply is started, if the clear switch is on, the step is performed together with the initialization process in step S6. The setting change process of S7 is executed and the setting change state can be controlled. If the clear switch is off, the setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed together with the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation state can be controlled. If the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off when the power supply is started, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. On the other hand, it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed, but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and interrupts are permitted (step S10). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information such as the number of times of winning and the probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of the probability change state) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After storing the hold information and the number of hold memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the number of hold memories, the read-ahead judgment, etc. is set on the effect control board 12. Be told. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be in the open state in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 has a configuration in which the winning probability of a big hit and the payout rate change according to a set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the jackpot winning probability and the ball output rate are changed by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of 6 stages from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a big hit, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the probability of winning a big hit. In this example, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and the smaller the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 is, the lower the advantage is. .. If the jackpot winning probability changes according to the set value, the ball output rate may also change according to the set value. While the jackpot winning probability is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state may change according to the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured so that any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player can be set. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by transmitting a set value designation command from the side of the main board 11 to the side of the effect control board 12.

FIG. 7 shows a configuration example of the display result determination table. FIG. 7A shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special figure used when the variable special figure is the first special figure, and FIG. 7B shows the second special figure of the variable special figure. A configuration example of the display result determination table for the second special figure used in the case of the figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 is assigned to the special figure display result which is the variable display result of the special symbol according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure may be used.

In the display result judgment table, when the game state is in the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values than in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state) are displayed as a special figure of "big hit". Assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high-probability state such as a probabilistic state in which the probabilistic change control is performed, there is a probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the jackpot game state as compared with the low-probability state such as the normal state or the time-saving state. It gets higher.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, it is determined that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. A value has been assigned. In the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as a "small hit" is the probability of being determined to be controlled to the small hit game state regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that they have the same value as the judgment table. It should be noted that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be different according to the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit gaming state as "small hit" may be the same probability.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is irrespective of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit", and while only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, the set value 2 to the set value 6 In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result judgment table for the first special figure and the display result judgment table for the second special figure, when the game state is the probability change state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values is a big hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for judgment. When the set value is 1, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to the "big hit", so that only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set, while the set value 2 to the set value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set to the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is small for judging the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the hit judgment value. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the probabilistic state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the set value as in the case where the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state. Regardless of, it is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for judging the small hit. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and the non-common numerical range of the big hit determination value regardless of the set value of 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping with the range of the large hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

The set value that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous the player may be. The playability may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variation state is 65%. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the gaming ball is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during the jackpot game. While controlling the game state after the end of the big hit game to a probabilistic state based on passing through the switch, the game property (so-called V) in which the ratio of the game ball passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special figure. Probability variation type), and when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during high base (during time reduction control). It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) in which the ball is controlled to a big hit gaming state based on passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game playability is the same, but the jackpot probability and the small hit are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be obtained during the jackpot game is small while the probability is high (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the playability is changed according to the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as an effect switch (in order to execute a predetermined effect each time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). When the set value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (to control the game state to the probability change state or the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch). It may be used as a switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination value in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. The variation pattern may be determined at a different ratio depending on the set value based on the allocation of the determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common ratio regardless of the set value. Since the execution rate of normal reach or super reach differs depending on the set value, the set value may be suggested by the frequency of execution of normal reach or super reach. Alternatively, the execution ratios of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. In addition, it may be possible to execute an arbitrary setting suggestion effect at different ratios according to the set value.

(Main operation of the effect control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 8 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 9, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when receiving an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process "7" in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify the end of the jackpot game state. Update to "" and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When a symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a percentage of "0%" and the other may have a percentage of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature section 109SG)
Next, the feature unit 109SG (hereinafter, abbreviated as the present feature unit 109SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 109S, a movable body unit 109SG400 is provided between the gaming board 2 and the image display device 5 provided on the back side thereof. ..

The movable body unit 109SG400 has a base 109SG410 as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A). The first movable body 109SG401 is located at the center of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction, and the second movable body 109SG402L is located at the left side of the base 109SG410 in the left-right width direction. The third movable body 109SG402R is arranged respectively.

Further, the movable body unit 109SG400 includes a first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401, a second movable body motor 109SG422 for operating the second movable body 109SG402L, and a third. It has a third movable body motor 109SG423 for operating the movable body 109SG402R. Therefore, the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R in the feature unit 109SG can operate separately from the first movable body 109SG401. Further, a movable body LED 109SG495 is built in a predetermined position of the first movable body 109SG401 (for example, an upper position of the first movable body 109SG401).

Of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the first movable body 109SG401 is a retracted position which is a lower position of the image display device 5 by being driven by the first movable body motor 109SG421. (See FIG. 10-3 (A)), the suggested position above the retracted position (see FIG. 10-3 (B)), the effect above the suggested position and also the front position of the image display device 5. It can be moved to the position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)).

The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are retracted positions (FIG. 10) which are lower positions of the image display device 5 by driving the second movable body motor 109SG422 and the third movable body motor 109SG423. -3 (A)), the first movable body 109SG401 that has moved to the effect position can be moved to the left-right proximity position (see FIG. 10-3 (C)).

In the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-3 (A) to 10-3 (C), the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are all in the retracted position. The first state of the movable body unit 109SG400 and the first movable body 109SG401 are located at the suggested positions, while the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the retracted positions. The second state of the movable body unit 109SG400, the first movable body 109SG401 is located at the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are located at the effect position. The state of being located close to the left and right sides of the movable body unit 109SG400 is defined as the third state.

FIG. 10-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the feature unit 109SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), the command 8001H is a first variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. .. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), it is determined whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is "missing", "big hit", or "small hit". Different EXT data are set according to the result (pre-determined result) and the determination result (big hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is to be used when the variable display result is "big hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. .. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit A" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit B" and the big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "probability variable jackpot C". The command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot". The command 8C05H is the sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small hit".

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is used as the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time saving control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is executed by the time saving control. On the other hand, it is a second game state specification command corresponding to a game state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high probability low base state, time saving no probability change state) in which the probability change control is performed but the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9503H is the time reduction control and probability change. This is the fourth game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high accuracy high base state, time reduction probability change state) in which control is performed together.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal opening big hit state and the high-speed opening big hit state described later corresponds to. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning determination result designation commands) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit", the judgment result of the big hit type (probability change or non-probability change), and the small hit as the judgment result at the time of winning. .. Further, the command C6XXH is a variation category command indicating a determination result of whether the random value for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern of "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" as the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

The commands shown in FIG. 10-4 (A) are examples, and some of these commands may not be provided, or different commands may be used in place of these commands. You may add a command different from the command in. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in the feature unit 109SG, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern , Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the display result of the general map is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 shown in FIG. 10-10, and updates various numerical data by software to update the random number value. Numerical data indicating a part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "big hit" to the big hit game state, for example. It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type has any of "probability variation jackpot A", "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random value used to determine, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "out of normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

FIG. 10-6 (A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. The feature unit 109SG uses a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , The first special figure and the second special figure may use individual special figure display result determination tables.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "missing".

In the special figure display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment determines whether or not the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state. It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature unit 109SG, when the game state is the probability change state (high probability state), more judgment values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit". As a result, in the probability change state (high probability state) in which the probability change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the special figure display result is controlled as a "big hit" in the big hit game state in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). Then, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit gaming state is higher than the probability of being determined (about 1/300 in the main feature unit 109SG) (about 1 in the main feature unit 109SG). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, it is determined that when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probability changing state (high probability state), it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as compared with the case of the normal state or the time saving state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state so that the probability of the game is high.

Further, FIG. 10-6 (B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is determined based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. The table referenced for.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, regardless of whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result judgment table 2, whether or not the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result judgment is controlled to the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit". It is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in the feature unit 109SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different between the case of the special figure game of the first special figure and the case of the second special figure. There is. Specifically, in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure, the judgment value is assigned to "small hit", but in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, it is assigned to "small hit". Judgment value is not assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the second start winning is formed by the variable winning ball device 6B by executing the time saving control. In the high base state where a prize is given to the mouth and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hit" is almost not generated, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In a high base state in which a game ball easily enters the winning opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which a large number of game balls cannot be obtained and to prevent the game interest from being deteriorated.

FIG. 10-7 (A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. When the jackpot type determination table in the feature unit 109SG is determined to control the jackpot game state with the special figure display result as "big hit", any of a plurality of jackpot types can be selected based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It is a table referenced to determine the crab. In the jackpot type determination table, whether the special symbol whose variable display (variable display) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (first). 2 The numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot", "probability variation jackpot A", or "probability variation jackpot A", depending on whether the game is a special figure game by the special symbol display device 4B). It is assigned to a plurality of types of jackpots such as "probability variation jackpot B" and "probability variation jackpot C".

Here, the jackpot type in the feature unit 109SG will be described with reference to FIG. 10-7 (B). In the feature unit 109SG, the jackpot type includes high accuracy control and time saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability change jackpot A" and "probability change jackpot B" that are executed and shift to the high-accuracy high-base state, and high-accuracy low-base state in which high-accuracy control is executed but time saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot game state. A "probability variation jackpot C" that shifts and a "non-probability variation jackpot" that shifts to a low probability high base state by executing only the time saving control after the end of the jackpot game state are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) to change the special variable winning ball device 7 into the first state which is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state by the "probability variation jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player. .. The big hit game state by the "probability change big hit C" is a normal open big hit in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). .. In addition, the jackpot game state by "probability variation jackpot C" and "non-probability variation jackpot" is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds) in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state which is advantageous for the player. It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, "Probability change jackpot A" is called 10 rounds (10R) probability variation jackpot, "Probability variation jackpot B" is called 5 rounds (5R) probability variation jackpot, and "Probability variation jackpot C" is called 2 rounds (2R) probability variation jackpot. It may be called.

Further, although not particularly shown, the small hit game state in the feature unit 109SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state which is advantageous to the player twice, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. After the small hit game is completed, the game state immediately before the small hit game is inherited.

The high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state of the probability variation jackpot are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that occurs again is a probability variation big hit, the high probability control and the time saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit game state, so that the big hit game state continuously occurs without going through the normal state. , So-called consecutive villa state.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the "non-probability change big hit" is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the feature unit 109SG), or the special figure of the predetermined number of times. It ends when it becomes a big hit game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), "probability variable jackpot A" and "probability variable jackpot A" are set according to whether the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure or the second special figure. The allocation of judgment values for the jackpot types of "probability variation jackpot B", "probability variation jackpot C", and "non-probability variation jackpot" is different. That is, when the special figure to be variably displayed is the first special figure, the determination value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "probability change jackpot B" or "probability change" with a small number of rounds. While assigned to the jackpot type of "big hit C", if the special figure that is variably displayed is the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". Not done. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. When the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Therefore, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be made different. In particular, in the special figure game using the second special figure, it is not determined that the jackpot type is set to "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C" to control the normal open jackpot state or the high-speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the gaming state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the number of winning balls obtained is small. It is possible to prevent the game interest from deteriorating.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7 (A), the allocation of the determination value for the jackpot type of "non-probability variation" is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Since it is the same regardless of whether it exists, the probability of becoming a non-probability jackpot and the probability of becoming a probabilistic jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is a special figure game of the first special figure or a second special figure. It is said that.

Therefore, as described above, the allocation of the judgment values for the "probability variation jackpot B" and the "probability variation jackpot C" differs depending on whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value to the "probability change jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure, and for the "probability change jackpot A" having a large number of rounds, the second It is set so that the case of the special figure game of the special figure is easier to determine than the case of the special figure game of the first special figure.

Even in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from that of the special figure game of the first special figure is the big hit of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". It may be assigned to a type. For example, in the case of the special figure game of the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than in the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is assigned to the jackpot type of "probability variation jackpot B" or "probability variation jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to the common table data regardless of whether the game is the special figure game of the first special figure or the second special figure.

FIG. 10-8 shows the fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In the feature unit 109SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is variable according to each of the case of "non-reach" and the case of "reach". A plurality of fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "out of reach" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "out of reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the missed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “off”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" is called a big hit fluctuation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which the reach effect of the super reach is executed. Although the feature unit 109SG provides only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, and so on are provided. It may be provided.

The fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG includes a fluctuation pattern of a special hit corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "probability variable big hit C". PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is executed in the feature unit 109SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

Further, in the present feature unit 109SG, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, and the like. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the determination is made using only the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random values for determining the variation pattern type are used. The type of the variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method of determining a fluctuation pattern in the feature unit 109SG. In this feature unit 109SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved storages.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-9, when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is used using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α1 jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach α2 jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach β1 jackpot fluctuation pattern) And PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot).

If the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation patterns are set to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern) and PB1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. -2 (Variation pattern of super reach α1 jackpot), PB1-3 (Variation pattern of super reach α2 jackpot), PB1-4 (Variation pattern of super reach β1 jackpot) and PB1-5 (Variation pattern of super reach β2 jackpot) To decide from.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B have the same number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, while PB1-2 and PB1. The number of determination values assigned to -3, PB1-4, and PB1-5 is different. Specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, 2 for PB1-1, 45 for PB1-2, 150 for PB1-3, 300 for PB1-4, and 500 for PB1-5. Each value is assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, there are 2 determination values for PB1-1, 30 determination values for PB1-2, 135 determination values for PB1-3, 315 determination values for PB1-4, and 515 determination values for PB1-5. Each is assigned. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 and β2 at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variation jackpot PB1-4. Alternatively, since it is determined to be PB1-5, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

If the variable display result is a small hit, a special hit variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special hit variation pattern) using the special hit variation pattern determination table. To do. That is, in the present feature unit 109SG, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is the probability variation big hit C or the small hit, so that the player can perform the variable display from the variation pattern. It is difficult to identify whether the result is a probabilistic big hit C or a small hit.

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 2 or less, the deviation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern determination table A is selected. Using the out-of-reach variation pattern determination table A, the variation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-range variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 out-of-reach variation pattern), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 3, the deviation pattern determination table B for deviation is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table B, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-2 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "off" in the normal game state (low base state) and the number of reserved memory of the variation special figure is 4, the deviation pattern determination table C for loss is selected and the deviation is achieved. Using the fluctuation pattern determination table C for use, the fluctuation patterns are PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation pattern of non-reach loss), PA2-1 (variation pattern of normal reach loss), PA2-2 (variation pattern of super reach α1 loss), and PA2. It is determined from -3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α2 deviation), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β1 deviation), and PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β2 deviation).

If the variable display result is "out of place" in the time saving state (high base state), the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the out-of-order fluctuation pattern determination table D is used to set the variation pattern to PA1-4. (Non-reach out-of-time shortening fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach out-of-time fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α1 out-of-order fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach α2 out-of-range fluctuation pattern), and PA2 It is determined from -4 (fluctuation pattern out of super reach β1) and PA2-5 (variation pattern out of super reach β2).

That is, when the variable display result is "off" in the feature unit 109SG, the special figure is based on the fact that the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or the time is shortened. Since the variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern (PA1-1), the variable display is executed at a higher rate due to the shortening fluctuation pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4). It is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a big hit while preventing the game from being delayed.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the variable display of the super reach α1 (variable display of the fluctuation patterns PA2-2 and PB1-2) in the feature unit 109SG has a special figure variable display time of 40. It is a second, and it is a variable display that executes a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A as the reach effect of the super reach. The variable display of the super reach α2 (variable display of the variable patterns PA2-3 and PB1-3) has a special figure variable display time of 50 seconds, and as a reach effect of the super reach, a battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is produced. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of super reach β1 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a reach effect of super reach, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display that executes. The variable display of Super Reach β2 (variable display of variable patterns PA2-5 and PB1-5) has a special figure variable display time of 60 seconds, and as a super reach reach effect, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A is produced. It is a variable display that executes.

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot expectation of each variable display in the feature unit 109SG is set to the highest jackpot expectation of super reach β2, and thereafter, super reach β1 and super reach α2. , Super reach α1, normal reach, non-reach, and the jackpot expectation is set higher in this order (big hit expectation in each variable display in this feature unit 109SG: super reach β2> super reach β1> super reach α2> super reach α1 > Normal reach> Non-reach).

In other words, paying attention to the variable display of the super reach, in this feature unit 109SG, which of the ally character A and the ally character B displayed as the battle effect (the reach effect of the super reach) is the battle effect (super). The jackpot expectation differs depending on the combination of whether the enemy character displayed as the reach effect) is the enemy character A or the enemy character B.

In the RAM 102 of the feature unit 109SG, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a game control data holding area 109SG150 as shown in FIG. 10-10. Is provided. The game control data holding area 109SG150 shown in FIG. 10-10 includes a first special figure holding storage unit 109SG151A, a second special figure holding storage unit 109SG151B, a normal drawing holding storage unit 109SG151C, and a game control flag setting unit 109SG152. , The game control timer setting unit 109SG153, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, and the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 are provided.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A is a special feature in which the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) is generated, but it has not been started yet. The reserved data of the figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the first starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the data is stored until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 109SG151A in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will occur.

The second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B has not been started yet, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and the starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B associates the winning order (the order of detecting the game ball) with the second starting winning opening with the holding number, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Hold data such as a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern extracted from a random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment. As a result, the number is stored until it reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 109SG151B in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game. Based on the result), it becomes pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a big hit will occur.

It should be noted that the hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first start condition due to the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening and the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. The hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating which of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening the game ball has passed (entered) may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. ..

The normal figure hold storage unit 109SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit 109SG151C associates the game ball with the hold number in the order of passing through the passage gate 41, and determines the normal figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for use is set as pending data, and is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

The game control flag setting unit 109SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 109SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 109SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 109SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 109SG154 may be provided with a random counter for the CPU 103 to count a part or all of the game random numbers so that they can be updated by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, a random number value not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value, and according to the execution of the software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. It may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or a part of the numerical data.

The game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control data holding area 109SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11 (A), for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. Has been done. The effect control data holding area 109SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11 (A) includes an effect control flag setting unit 109SG191, an effect control timer setting unit 109SG192, an effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. I have.

The effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 has a plurality of types capable of updating the state according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5 and the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11. Flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 109SG191 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as the display operation of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the effect control timer setting unit 109SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 stores data indicating the count values of the plurality of types of counters.

The effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In the feature unit 109SG, the data constituting the start winning command buffer 109SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the effect control buffer setting unit 109SG194. The reception command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning is stored in the storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the first special figure reserved storage. A corresponding area) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “1-0”) corresponding to the first special figure during variable display are provided. Further, the start winning command buffer 109SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4" corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved storages in the second special figure reserved storage. (Area corresponding to) and a storage area (area corresponding to the buffer number “2-0”) corresponding to the second special figure during variable display are provided. When there is a start prize to the 1st start winning opening or the 2nd starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (1st starting opening winning designation command or the 2nd starting opening winning designation command), the symbol designation command, and the variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure hold storage and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command receive command buffer 109SG194A are the start opening winning designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category designation command, A storage area (entry) for storing the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage separately is secured in association with the hold storage number notification command.

The stored contents of these storage areas (entries) will be described later when the start condition is satisfied and the variable display of the highest held storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") is started. The stored contents of the buffer number "1-0" or the buffer number "2-0" for storing the contents of the reserved storage for which the start condition is satisfied are displayed in a variable manner. It is designed to be cleared in the special figure hit waiting process that is executed when the is finished.

Further, in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A of the feature unit 109SG, the hold display flag in which the flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the hold storage display is set is set in the first special figure hold storage and the second special figure hold storage. Figure A storage area is secured for each storage area (entry) so that it can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the hold storage.

In the hold display flag, "0" corresponding to the display pattern of the normal hold storage display is stored when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not determined in the look-ahead notice setting process described later. As a result, the hold storage display in the normal display mode (for example, white circle) is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided in the lower part of the image display device 5. When it is decided to execute the reading notice effect, "1" (square) corresponding to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (for example, square (◇) or star (☆)) different from the normal display mode. (◇))) Or "2" (star (☆)) is set, so that the reserved storage display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D and the second reserved storage display area 109SG005U. In the variable display corresponding to the hold storage display, it is foretold that there is a high possibility of a big hit or a super reach.

The effect control CPU 120 stores the command at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening from the beginning (the youngest entry of the buffer number) in the empty entry corresponding to the first special figure hold storage of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A. Then, at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening, the command is stored from the beginning (the entry with the youngest buffer number) in the free entry corresponding to the second special figure hold storage of the command buffer 109SG194A received at the time of starting winning. I will go. At the time of the start winning, the start opening prize designation command to the hold storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the start opening prize designation command is placed in the storage area corresponding to each of the end "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special figure hold storage or the second special figure hold storage. , The symbol specification command, the variable category specification command, and the hold storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11 (B) is an entry (buffer) corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display that ended immediately before each time the variable display of the decorative symbol was started. The entry (entry with the number "1-0" or "2-0") is deleted, and the entry corresponding to the hold storage of the variable display to be started (buffer number "1-1" or "2") is deleted. The stored contents of the entries after the hold storage of the variable display to be started are shifted from those stored in the entry corresponding to -1 ”. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbol of the first special figure hold storage is completed in the stored state shown in FIG. 10-11 (B), each command stored in the buffer number "0" is deleted and the buffer number is deleted. Each command stored in "1" is shifted to the buffer number "0", and each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "2" is moved to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1". Each command that is shifted and stored in the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "3" and "4" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, the buffer number "0" is an area (entry) for storing each command related to the hold storage that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning determination process of the feature unit 109SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 10-12. In the start winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not it is in a state (step 109SGS101a). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 109SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved special figure reservations, which is the number of reserved special figure games using the first special figure, is the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS102). The CPU 103 may specify the first special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the first reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the first special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "1" (step 109SGS102; N). Step 109 SGS103).

Variable when the first start port switch 22A is off in step 109SGS101a (step 109SGS101; N) or when the first special figure hold storage number reaches the upper limit value in step 109SGS102 (step 109SGS102; Y). Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is in the ON state ( Step 109 SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is in the ON state (step 109SGS101b; Y), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether or not it is a value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) (step 109SGS105). The CPU 103 may specify the second special figure reserved storage number by reading, for example, the second reserved storage number count value which is the stored value of the second reserved storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. When the second special figure hold storage number is not the upper limit value in step 109SGS105 (step 109SGS105; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 109SG155 is set to "2" (step 109SGS105; N). Step 109 SGS106).

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS103 and step 109SGS106, the special figure hold storage number corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the storage value of the start port buffer, is updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first hold memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. Further, the second reserved memory count value is set to 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of reserved storages is also updated to be added by 1 (step 109SGS108). For example, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 109SG154, may be updated so as to be added by 1.

After executing the process of step 109SGS108, the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the jackpot type determination from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random number of the game control counter setting unit 109SG154. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for the purpose and the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern determination are extracted (step 109SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step 109SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151A stores numerical data indicating the random numbers MR1 to MR3, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the start port buffer value is "2". Numerical data indicating the random values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special figure reservation storage unit 109SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result and the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set as "big hit", and further, the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of big hit when it is called "big hit". The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol. By executing the process of step 109SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used for determining the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol and the variable display mode including the variable display time.

Following the process of step 109SGS110, the transmission setting of the starting port winning designation command according to the starting port buffer value is performed (step 109SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the send command pointer in the send command buffer. The setting for transmitting the first start opening prize designation command to 12 is made. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, so that the effect control board 12 is subjected to. Make settings to send the second start port winning designation command. The start port winning designation command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

Following the process of step 109SGS111, the winning random number value determination process is executed (step 109SGS112). After that, for example, the hold storage number notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 by storing the storage address of the hold storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. (Step 109 SGS113). The hold storage number notification command set in this way is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. Be transmitted.

After executing the process of step 109SGS113, it is determined whether or not the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 109SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS115), and then the process of step 109SGS104 is performed. move on. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2" (step 109SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step 109SGS116), and then the start winning is won. End the process. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

FIG. 10-13 (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 109SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random number value determination process. When the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started in the feature unit 109SG, the special symbol display result (variable display of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S22 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-11) described later. The result) is regarded as a "big hit", and it is determined whether or not to control the big hit game state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (step S23 in FIG. 5, FIG. 10-12) described later, the determination of the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is performed. On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value determination processing in step 109SGS112 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). As a result, it is determined whether or not it is determined that the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as a result of displaying the special symbol, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode accompanied by super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started, that is, whether or not to make a big hit at the start of the variable display is determined. Before, it is determined that the special figure display result is a "big hit" and which category the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is the variable display mode, and based on this determination result, the effect control CPU 120 or the like determines. , As will be described later, advance notice effects such as pre-reading advance notice effects will be executed.

In the winning random number value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), the CPU 103 first confirms the state of the time saving flag and the probability variation flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 109SG152, for pachinko gaming. The current gaming state of the machine 1 is specified (step 109SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the probabilistic flag is off and the time saving flag is on, and both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are in the time saving state. When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 109SGS121, the special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 109SGS122). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step 109SGS123). In the jackpot determination range, individual determination values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected by the process of step 109SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number value MR1. It suffices if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determination value that matches the random number value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating a minimum value (lower limit value) and a maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, since it is determined that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit".

When it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not achieved in the variable display (step 109SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 2 is selected and set (step 109 SGS124). After that, it is determined whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 109SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within the predetermined small hit determination range (step 109SGS125).

When the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, when it is determined to be a small hit in the variable display (step 109SGS125; Y), the variable display result is "small hit". The transmission setting of the sixth symbol designation command, which is the symbol designation command corresponding to the above, is executed (step 109SGS126), the variation pattern determination table for special hits is selected and set (step 109SGS127), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138. ..

If the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit judgment range, that is, if the variable display result is "missing" in the variable display, the symbol corresponding to the variable display result being "missing". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is a designated command, is executed (step 109SGS128), and it is determined whether or not the time saving flag is on, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is the time saving state (step). 109SGS129). When the time saving flag is off (step 109SGS129; N), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set, and when the time reduction flag is on (step 109SGS129; Y), the deviation pattern determination table A is selected and set. Table D is selected and set (step 109SGS131). The deviation pattern determination table A is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved storages is 2 or less. Further, the deviation pattern determination table D is an deviation variation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which the time saving control is executed.

In this feature unit 109SG, in addition to the deviation pattern determination table A and the deviation variation pattern determination table D, the deviation pattern determination table B used when the number of reserved storages is three , The deviation pattern determination table C used when the number of reserved storages is 4, is prepared in advance, but as shown in FIG. 10-9, these are out of the deviation pattern determination tables A to C. In the deviation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. In the fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation patterns within the range that the random number value MR3 for the fluctuation pattern judgment can take, and the fluctuation pattern judgment table for deviation is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach variation pattern within the range that the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern can take. On the other hand, in the deviation pattern determination tables A to C, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach within the range that the random number value MR3 for the variation pattern determination can take. ..

Therefore, by determining the variation pattern using the deviation pattern determination table A in step 109SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always performed even if the number of reserved memories changes after the determination. Therefore, in the determination at the time of starting winning, the variation pattern determination table A for loss is used for determination.

Further, when it is determined in step 109SGS123 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot during variable display (step 109SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A). , The jackpot type is determined based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 109SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 responds to the variable special figure (“first special figure” corresponding to “1” or “second special figure” corresponding to “2”) specified corresponding to the start port buffer value. , Select the jackpot type determination table data from the table data that composes the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected jackpot type determination table data, it is determined which of the plurality of types the jackpot type is determined.

In addition, a symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, a second symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot A, a third symbol designation command when the probability variation jackpot B, and a probability variation jackpot C. Executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the transmission setting of the 5th symbol designation command (step 109SGS133), and then determines whether or not the determined jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot. (Step 109 SGS134a). When the determined jackpot type is a non-probability variation jackpot (step 109SGS134a; Y), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and set as a table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 109SGS135), and the step Proceed to 109SGS138.

If the determined jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot (step 109SGS134a; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 109SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 109SGS127, step 109SGS130, step 109SGS131, step 109SGS135, and step 109SGS136, a numerical value indicating each fluctuation pattern judgment table set in each of these steps and a random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern judgment. Using the data, the variation category according to the range of the determination values including the random number MR3 is determined (step 109SGS138). In this feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (B), when at least the variable display result is "off", the variable display mode is "non-reach" in common regardless of the total number of reserved storages. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", a variable category that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach), and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" are provided. It suffices if it can be determined whether or not the variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, after setting for transmitting the variable category designation command according to the determination result by the process of step 109SGS138 to the effect control board 12 (step 109SGS132), the winning random number value determination process is ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 6 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 10-14, the effect control CPU 120 first receives from the main board 11 transmitted via the relay board 15 by confirming the stored contents of the effect control command reception buffer. It is determined whether or not there is a command (step 109SGS221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 109SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a receive command in step 109SGS221 (step 109SGS221; Y), for example, by checking the MODE data of the receive command, it is determined whether or not the receive command is the first start opening winning designation command. (Step 109 SGS222).

If the reception command is not the first start opening prize designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second start opening prize designation command (step 109SGS224).

If the reception command is not the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command in step 109SGS226 (step 109SGS226; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is a variable category command (step 109SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; N), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first hold storage number notification command (step 109SGS228).

If the reception command is not the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228 (step 109SGS228; N), it is determined whether or not the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command (step 109SGS230).

When the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS222 (step 109SGS222; Y), or when the reception command is the second start opening winning designation command in step 109SGS224 (step 109SGS224; Y), in step 109SGS226. When the receive command is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS226; Y), when the receive command is a variable category command in step 109SGS227 (step 109SGS227; Y), the receive command is the first hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS228. In the case (109SGS228; Y), when the reception command is the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; Y), the reception command is vacant in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the area (step 109SGS233), and the process returns to the process of step 109SGS221.

When the hold storage number notification command (first hold storage number notification command or second hold storage number notification command) is received together with the variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command) , The hold storage number notification command may not be stored in the reception command buffer 109SG194A at the time of starting winning. That is, it suffices that the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of the start winning can be sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A.

If the reception command is not the second hold storage number notification command in step 109SGS230 (step 109SGS230; N), settings are made according to other reception commands (step 109SGS234), and the process returns to step 109SGS221.

In the command analysis process of the feature unit 109SG, if the received command is any of the start opening prize designation command, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, and the hold storage number notification command, the received command is used when the start prize is won. An example of a form in which the reception command buffer 109SG194A is sequentially stored from the beginning of the free area is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when the reception command is the first start opening winning designation command, the hold storage number notification command is used. If a timer for waiting for reception is set and the hold storage number notification command is not received before the timer goes out, the entry hold storage that has not received the hold storage number notification command will be described later. It may be set out of the target of the reading notice effect.

FIG. 10-15 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 5 as the pre-reading notice setting process. In the read-ahead notice setting process shown in FIG. 10-15, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS241), and holds the hold storage (entry) in which the hold display flag is not set. It is determined whether or not there is (step 109SGS242a). If there is no hold memory for which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is hold memory for which the hold display flag is not set (step 109SGS242a; Y), Further, it is determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b).

Whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed depends on whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is 2 (whether or not the variable display is being executed) and the value of the effect control process flag. If is 2, the content of the process data of the variable display being executed may be referred to, and it may be determined whether or not the reach effect of the super reach is being executed.

If the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and if the reach effect of the super reach is not being executed (step 109SGS242bb; N), the entry (hold display flag is set). It is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the unset entry) is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a). When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a; Y), the process proceeds to step 109SGS250, and the symbol designation command stored in the entry indicates a miss or a jackpot. When it is a symbol designation command (step 109SGS243a; N), it is determined whether or not the symbol designation command stored in the entry is the first symbol designation command (symbol designation command indicating loss) (step 109SGS243b). ..

When the symbol designation command stored in the entry is not the first symbol designation command, that is, when the symbol designation command stored in the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 109SGS243b; N), The jackpot type is specified from the symbol specification command of the entry (step 109SGS244).

Then, for example, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193 and the jackpot type specified in step 109SGS244, the jackpot pre-reading (not shown) is performed. By referring to the advance notice effect determination table, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead advance notice effect and the display pattern when the look-ahead advance notice effect is executed (step 109SGS245).

In step 109SGS245, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the jackpot type specified in the process of step 109SGS244.

Specifically, there are two types of display patterns (notice types) for the pre-reading notice effect, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern α, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area 109SG005U as a white square (◇). When the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold memory display is displayed. It is displayed in area 109SG005U.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-16, when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is higher than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is also set high. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variable jackpot", the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined as the display pattern (notice type) is set lower than the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined.

With such a setting, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the display pattern β is displayed as the display pattern (notice type), the big hit type is higher than when the display pattern α is displayed. Is a probabilistic jackpot, and the player's expectation that it will be a probabilistic jackpot can be increased.

In addition, in this feature unit 109SG, when the variable display result is a big hit, the display pattern α or the white star that displays the hold memory display in the white square (◇) by always deciding the execution of the pre-reading notice effect. Although one of the display patterns β displayed in the shape (☆) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result is variable even when it is a big hit. A case may be provided in which the non-execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in the same manner as in the case where the display result is “off”.

Further, in step 109SGS243b, when the symbol designation command of the entry in which the display undecided flag is on is the first symbol designation command, that is, when it is a command indicating an outlier (step 109SGS243b; Y), the display is undecided. The variation category indicated by the variation category specification command of the entry in which the flag is on is specified (step 109SGS247). Specifically, if the variation category specification command of the entry is C600H, it is specified as a category of "non-reach" variation pattern, and if it is C601H, it is a category of "super reach" variation pattern. If it is C602H, it may be specified that it is a category of "other" fluctuation patterns including normal reach.

Then, for example, it is not shown based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading advance notice effect extracted from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 109SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in step 109SGS247. By referring to the pre-reading notice effect determination table at the time of loss, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) when the pre-reading notice effect is executed (step 109SGS248).

In step 109SGS248, for example, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the display pattern (notice type) are determined at a determination ratio as shown in FIG. 10-16. In the setting example of the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-16, the presence / absence of execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect and the determination ratio of the display pattern (notice type) are different depending on the category of the fluctuation pattern specified in the process of step 109SGS247. There is.

Specifically, two types of display patterns (notice types) are provided, a display pattern α and a display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern α, the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area is indicated by a white square (◇) in which the hold storage display is a specific mode. When it is displayed on 109SG005U and the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be the display pattern β, the hold storage display is a white star (☆) in a specific mode, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold It is displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U. When the pre-reading notice effect is determined not to be executed, the hold storage display is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold storage display area 109SG005U in a round shape (◯), which is a normal mode.

As shown in FIG. 10-16, when the variable display result is "off" and the variation pattern category is "other", the variable display result is "off" and the variation pattern category is "non". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set higher than in the case of "reach". Also, when the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "super reach", the variable display result is "off" and the variable pattern category is "other". The rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is executed (the rate determined other than "no notice effect") is set high.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set high. Further, when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the rate at which the display pattern α is determined is set higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". Furthermore, when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided when the variable display result is "off", when the variable pattern category is "other", the variable pattern category is "non-reach". The rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than in the case of, and when the fluctuation pattern category is "super reach", the display pattern is higher than when the fluctuation pattern category is "other". The rate at which β is determined is set high.

When the variable display result is "off", the rate at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be non-execution regardless of whether the variation pattern category is "non-reach", "other", or "super reach". Is set to the highest, and the ratio at which the pre-reading notice effect is determined to be executed and the display pattern β is determined is set to the lowest.

Further, when the variable display result is "big hit", the pre-reading notice effect is not determined to be non-execution (no advance notice effect), the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined to be executed, and the display pattern α. Alternatively, the rate at which the display pattern β is determined is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern α or the display pattern β is determined in any of the fluctuation pattern categories when the variable display result is “off”.

Further, when the variable display result is "off (non-reach)", "off (super reach)", or "off (other)", the display pattern α is determined when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined. Is set higher than the rate at which the display pattern β is determined. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (probability variable big hit)", when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is decided, the ratio at which the display pattern β is determined is the ratio at which the display pattern α is determined. Is set higher than.

When the display pattern α or the display pattern β is executed (displayed) as the display pattern (notice type) of the pre-reading notice effect by such a setting, the display pattern α or the display pattern β is not executed (displayed). There is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit", and especially when the display pattern β is executed (displayed), the variable display result will be a "big hit" and the jackpot type will be "probability variable jackpot". Since the ratio is increased, the player's expectation can be increased.

After the execution of step 109SGS248, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is determined in step 109SGS247, that is, the display pattern (notice type) is determined to be either the display pattern α or the display pattern β. Whether or not it is determined (step 109 SGS249).

After the execution of step 109SGS245 or when the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is determined (step 109SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (notice type) is set in the hold display flag of the entry (step). 109SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (notice type) determined in step 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern α indicating the hold storage display by “◇”, “1” is set in the hold display flag of the entry, and the step If the display pattern (notice type) determined in 109SGS245 or step 109SGS248 is the display pattern β indicating the hold storage display by “☆”, the hold display flag of the entry is set to “2”, and then the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

If the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is not determined in step 109SGS249 (step 109SGS249; N), after setting the hold display flag of the entry to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS249). 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Further, as described above, even when the reach effect of the super reach is being executed (step 109SGS242b; Y) or when the symbol designation command of the entry is a symbol designation command indicating a small hit (step 109SGS243a), the entry is also entered. After setting the hold display flag to "0" indicating a white "○" (step 109SGS250), the process proceeds to step 109SGS252.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A (step 109SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to any of "0", "1", and "2" set in the hold display flag. To. Further, even when the variable display is executed and the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A are shifted, the stored contents of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A after the shift are shown in FIG. 10-17. As shown, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U provided at the lower position of the image display device 5 is updated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-17, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○" as shown in FIG. 10-17. , When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", the display mode is "☆". It is displayed in. If the number of hold storages in the first special figure is two, two hold storage displays are displayed, and each hold storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the hold display flag of the corresponding hold storage. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the first special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D.

Further, if the number of the second special figure reserved storage is one, one reserved storage display is displayed. As for the display mode of the hold storage display, as in the case of the first special figure, when the flag value of the hold display flag corresponding to the hold storage is "0", it is displayed in the display mode of "○". When the flag value of the hold display flag is "1", it is displayed in the display mode of "◇", and when the flag value of the hold display flag is "2", "☆" is displayed. Displayed in mode. If the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is two, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, two reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display is a holding display of the corresponding reserved storage. As a mode according to the flag value set in the flag, for example, in the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "○" and the display mode in which the hold storage display of 1 is "☆", the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is displayed. Is displayed. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is three, three reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding reserved display flag of the reserved storage. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U. Further, if the number of reserved storages in the second special figure is four, four reserved storage displays are displayed, and each reserved storage display corresponds to a flag value set in the corresponding pending storage display flag. Is displayed in the second hold storage display area 109SG005U.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-17, the hold storage display is also displayed in a predetermined shift direction (in the feature unit 109SG, the screen is displayed) in response to the decrease (consumption) of the hold memory each time the variable display is executed. Shift toward the center of.

That is, when the hold memory is consumed in the variable display start setting process described later, which is executed at the start of the variable display, and the hold memory of the start winning command buffer 109SG194A is shifted, the start winning after the shift Based on the hold storage of the reception command buffer 109SG194A, the hold storage display in the first hold storage display area 109SG005D and the second hold storage display area 109SG005U is also shifted and displayed, and there is a new hold memory due to the start winning. In this case, the display pattern of the hold storage is determined and set in the hold display flag, and the first hold storage display area 109SG005D or the second hold is set in the display mode according to the flag value set in the hold display flag. It will be displayed in the storage display area 109SG005U.

The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the process of step 109SGS252 is executed in the pre-reading notice setting process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first reserved storage display area 109SG005D is not limited thereto. The process for updating the hold display of the second hold storage display area 109SG005U may be individually executed as a process different from the pre-reading notice setting process (for example, the hold display update process).

Further, the feature unit 109SG determines in step 109SGS242 whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the start winning, provided that the command at the time of starting winning is newly stored. Since the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time, a new storage of the command at the time of starting winning in both the first special figure and the second special figure in step 109SGS242 is performed. If it is determined that there is, that is, if there is an entry in which the display undecided flag is on in both the first special figure hold memory and the second special figure hold memory, both entries are pre-read notice. It is the target of decision on whether to execute or not to perform the production. Both the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start prize in the first special figure is newly stored and the hold memory in which the command at the time of the start prize in the second special figure is newly stored are executed and non-executed of the pre-reading notice effect. In the case of the decision target, if there is no entry of the hold display flag of "1" or "2" indicating the execution of the pre-reading notice effect, the hold display of the hold memory of the first special figure and the hold of the second special figure are held. The pre-reading notice effect may be executed at the same time on both sides of the display.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, when the start winning to the first starting winning opening and the starting winning to the second starting winning opening occur at the same time as described above, the command at the time of starting winning in the first special figure is issued. Both the newly stored hold memory and the newly stored hold memory in which the command at the time of the start winning in the second special figure is newly stored are subject to the determination of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect. In such a case, the execution and non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, and the execution and non-execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Execution may be decided by only one of them.

Specifically, when the game state is a normal state in which the high opening control is not performed, the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is held in the second special figure. Prioritize the execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in memory. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the first special figure is set. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure.

On the other hand, when the game state is a time saving state (high accuracy high base state / low accuracy high base state) in which high opening control is performed, execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure. Is prioritized over the decision of execution and non-execution of the pre-reading notice effect in the reserved memory in the first special figure. Then, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the second special figure, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure is uniquely decided not to be executed, and the second special figure is made. When it is decided not to execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the figure, it may be decided to execute or not execute the look-ahead notice effect in the hold memory in the first special figure.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271). When the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A The various command data and various flags stored in association with the above are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 109SGS272). The contents of the buffer number "1-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-1". 1 Special figure The first special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "1-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "1-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 109SGS271 (step 109SGS271; N), it is determined whether or not the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273). When the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 109SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is finished, and when the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 109SGS273; Y). ), Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure hold storage in the start winning command buffer 109SG194A, one buffer number. It shifts upward by the minute (step 109SGS274). The contents of the buffer number "2-0" are deleted because they cannot be shifted because there is no shift destination.

Specifically, the shift is made so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-1" of the second special figure hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-1". 2 Special figure The second special figure is shifted so that various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-3" of the hold storage are stored in association with the buffer number "2-2". The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 109SGS272 or step 109SGS274, the effect control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 109SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 109SGS276). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. To do.

In the feature unit 109SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot A, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, three symbols "7" as stop symbols. ”Determine the combination of decorative symbols (big hit symbols). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the third variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot B, a plurality of combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, "111") are used as stop symbols. It is determined from the combination of decorative patterns such as "333", "555", and "999"). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to the probability variation jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the fifth variable display result specification command corresponding to the non-probability change jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 has, for example, a decorative symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the sixth variable display result specification command corresponding to a small hit, the stop symbol is "334" or "778", which is the same chance as the probability variation big hit C. Decide from the inside. Further, when the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to the deviation, it is a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are not uniform as the stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance eyes. (Out of design) is decided.

In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

Then, in step 109SGS281, the effect control CPU 120 selects an effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 109SGS282).

In the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are controlled. The sound control execution data, the operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in order in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays the effect device (image display as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). Control of the device 5, various lamps as production parts, speakers 8L, 8R as production parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (step 109SGS283). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 109SG, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern designation command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one. However, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the specified command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 109SGS284). Further, the first time is set in the variable display control timer (step 109SGS285). The first time is, for example, 33 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 converts the variable display image data including the image data indicating the display state of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols into the VRAM each time the first time elapses. The writing and display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized (see FIG. 10-20).

Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 109SGS287). When the variation pattern of the variable display is the variation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; Y), the second time is set in the movable body control timer (step 109SGS288). The second time is, for example, 1 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control CPU 120 of the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 each time the first time elapses. Take control. As a result, the movement control of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is realized (see FIG. 10-20).

After the execution of step 109SGS288, or when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is not the fluctuation pattern of the super reach (step 109SGS287; N), the effect control CPU 120 changes the value of the effect control process flag during the effect display process (step). The value corresponding to S172) is set, and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 109SGS286).

FIG. 10-19 is a flowchart showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer to -1 (step 109SGS301, step 109SGS302, step 109SGS303). When the variable display is a variable display of super reach (step 109SGS303b; Y), the value of the movable body control timer is set to -1 (step 109SGS303c).

After the execution of step 109SGS303c, or when the super reach is not variablely displayed (step 109SGS303b; N), the process proceeds to step 109SGS306.

In step 109 SGS306, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the process timer has timered out. If the process timer is out, the process data is switched (step 109SGS307). That is, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (step 109SGS308). Further, the control state for the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, etc., which are set next (step 109SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer is not timer-out, the effect device (for effect) according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.). The control of the component) is executed (step 109SGS309b).

After executing the process of step 109SGS309a or step 109SGS309b, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display is a super reach variable display (step 109SGS309f).

When the variable display is the variable display of the super reach (step 109SGS309f; Y), it is further determined whether or not the movable body control timer is timer-out (109SGS309g). When the movable body control timer is out of time (step 109SGS309g; Y), the first movable body motor 109SG421, the second movable body motor 109SG422, and the third movable body motor 109SG423 are driven according to the contents of the process data. (Step 109 SGS309h). Then, the movable body control timer is reset (the second time is set again in the movable body control timer), and the process proceeds to step 109SGS310 (step 109SGS309i).

If the variable display is not the variable display of super reach (step 109SGS309f; N) and the movable body control timer is not timer-out (step 109SGS309g; N), execute the processes of step 109SGS309h and step 109SGS309i. Proceed to step 109SGS310 without proceeding.

Next, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109 SGS310). When the variable display control timer is out of the timer (step 109SGS310; Y), the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen (33 ms from the time of the previous image update) during the variable display including the decorative symbol on the left, middle, and right. Image data of the screen to be displayed after the lapse of time) is created and written in a predetermined area of VRAM (step 109SGS311). In this way, the image display device 5 realizes variable display control of the decorative pattern and display control of other images (display control of moving images). The display control unit 123 sends a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the image display device 5. Output. In this way, the image display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the decorative symbol in the variation of the decorative symbol. Further, the first time is reset to the variable display control timer (step 109SGS312).

If the variable display control timer is not timered out (step 109SGS310; N), after executing step 109SGS312, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the variable display time timer is timered out (step 109SGS313). .. If the variable display time timer is out, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not timer-out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the ON state (step 109SGS314; Y), the value of the effect control process flag is per special figure. The value is updated according to the wait process (step S173) (step 109SGS315). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of the timer, the control shifts to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation specification command is received. Therefore, for example, the fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between the boards or the like. Is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be terminated when the regular variable display time elapses (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol).

In the process table used for the variable display control of the decorative symbol, the process data during the variable display of the decorative symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer setting values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of step 109SGS306 times out, there is no process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.) to be switched, and variable display control of the decorative symbol based on the process table. Is finished.

Next, the operation mode of each effect device during the reach effect of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 in the feature unit 109SG will be described. The variable display effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, regarding the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, when the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 is started, the first enlarged display period , The character image displayed on the image display device 5 in the second enlarged display period and the third enlarged display period (in the case of the reach effect of the super reach α1, the reach effect of the ally character A and the enemy character A, and the reach effect of the super reach α2 If there is, the enlarged display of the ally character A and the enemy character B) is executed.

Specifically, in the first enlarged display period, the character image is enlarged from the normal display magnification (1 times) to the display magnification m1 at a constant speed, and in the second enlarged display period, the character image is displayed from the display magnification m1. The image is magnified at a constant speed up to a magnification of m2, and in the third enlarged display period, the character image is magnified at a constant speed from the display magnification m2 to the display magnification m3. Then, after the third enlarged display period ends, the display magnification of the character image is maintained at m3 for a predetermined period, and the display magnification of the character image is returned to the normal display magnification at the timing when the predetermined period elapses. ..

In the feature unit 109SG, the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period are all periods of the same length. Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the difference between the display magnifications is the largest between the normal display magnification and the display magnification m1, and the difference between the display magnification m2 and the display magnification m3. Is the smallest. That is, in the feature unit 109SG, the enlargement speed of the character image is set to be the fastest in the first enlargement display period and the slowest in the third enlargement display period (character image enlargement speed: 1st enlarged display period> 2nd enlarged display period> 3rd enlarged display period). In the feature unit 109SG, "fast enlargement speed" means that the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is large.

After that, in the feature unit 109SG, the period T2, the third enlarged display period, and the character image are the combined period of the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (the period for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect). A period including a predetermined period for maintaining the display magnification at m3 may be referred to as a period T3.

As shown in FIG. 10-21, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, if the variable display result is a big hit, the period T3 ends and the variable display ends. As an effect of notifying that the variable display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the left and right of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving to a close position (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to each position. The movable body motion effect A for moving to the retracted position (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-22, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, if the variable display result is out of alignment, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed.

Hereinafter, in the feature unit 109SG, the execution period of the movable body effect A and the detachment notification effect may be referred to as a period T4. For these periods T2 to period T4, period T3 is the shortest period and period T4 is the longest period (length of period T2 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3).

Further, during the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the effect image is also displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion effect A (only when the variable display result is a big hit). ..

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, in the image display device 5, the first movable body extends over the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period). A movable body motion suggestion effect A in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the 109SG401 at a speed V1 is executed.

Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are imaged from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 over the period T4 as a part of the above-mentioned movable body movement effect A. It moves (spreads) toward the edge of the display device 5. The absolute value of the velocity V2 is larger than the absolute value of the velocity V1. That is, the movable body motion effect A in the feature unit 109SG is also an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S moves at a higher speed than the movable body motion suggestion effect A.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, the light emission of the movable body LED109SG495 is also executed. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the movable LED 109SG 495 has the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) and the middle of the period T3 (more accurately). Causes the movable body LED109SG495 to emit light at brightness C1 from the start timing of the first enlarged display period to the end timing of the third enlarged display period). Further, when the variable display result is a big hit, the movable LED 109SG 495 is caused to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1, over the period T4.

In addition, during the reach production of Super Reach α1 and Super Reach α2, it is possible to output four types of production sounds such as BGM, SE (sound effect) of music, motion suggestion sound, and jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. The type of sound that is output differs depending on the time during the reach production.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the BGM is a production sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of the variable display, and is from the speakers 8L and 8R only during the period T3. Output is stopped. That is, the output of the BGM in the reach effect is executed from the start timing of the reach effect to the end timing of the period T2 and over the period T4.

Further, SE (sound effect) is a directing sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R from the start of variable display like BGM, but unlike BGM, there is no period during which the output from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. .. That is, the output of SE in the reach effect is executed over the entire reach effect.

The motion suggestion sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. That is, the motion suggestion sound is output only in the period T2, which is the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and is not output in other periods. The jackpot notification sound is a sound effect output from the speakers 8L and 8R as a part of the movable body operation effect A. That is, the jackpot notification sound is output only in the period T4, which is the execution period of the movable body motion effect A when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is not output in other periods.

As shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, regarding the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, when the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2 is started, the first enlarged display period, the first The character image displayed on the image display device 5 during the 2 enlarged display period and the 3rd enlarged display period (if the reach effect of the super reach β1, the ally character B and the enemy character A, and the reach effect of the super reach β2) Enlarged display of ally character B and enemy character B) is executed.

Hereinafter, the enlarged display of the character image in the variable display of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, the light emitting mode of the movable LED 109SG495, the output of the BGM, SE, the operation suggestion sound, and the jackpot notification sound from the speakers 8L and 8R are shown in FIG. The description of the same embodiment as the variable display of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2 shown in 21 and FIG. 10-22 will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 10-23, during the reach production of super reach β1 and super reach β2, if the variable display result is a big hit, it is variable from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. As an effect of notifying that the display result is a big hit, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body 109SG401. After moving (after changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), after a while, the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the respective retracted positions. The movable body motion effect B to be moved (changes the movable body unit 109SG400 from the third state to the first state) is executed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-24, during the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, if the variable display result is out of alignment, from the end timing of the period T3 to the end timing of the variable display. By not operating the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R, the deviation notification effect for notifying that the variable display result is out of order is executed. The movable body effect B is an effect that is executed over the period T4 in the same manner as the movable body effect A and the disconnection notification effect described above.

Further, during the reach production of the super reach β1 and the super reach β2, as shown in FIGS. 10-23 and 10-24, the above-mentioned period T2 (first enlarged display period and second enlarged display period) is extended. The movable body motion suggestion effect B for repeatedly moving (reciprocating) the first movable body 109SG401 between the retracted position and the suggested position is executed. The period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect B is shorter than the above-mentioned period T3 (). Length of period T1 to period T4: period T4> period T2> period T3> period T1).

As described above, in the variable display of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period are movable bodies. While the motion suggestion effect is executed, the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed in the third enlarged display period. Further, in the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the first enlarged display period has the fastest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement rate of the image per unit time is large), and the third. The enlargement display period is set to the slowest enlargement speed of the character image (the enlargement ratio of the image per unit time is small).

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-26 (A), comparing the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a star-shaped effect image on the image display device 5. The 109SG005S repeatedly acts on the first movable body 109SG401 (a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1), and the first movable body 109SG401 itself. Does not operate, whereas the movable body motion suggestion effect B is different in that the first movable body 109SG401 repeatedly moves between the retracted position and the suggested position. On the other hand, both the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

As shown in FIG. 10-26 (B), when the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B are compared, the movable body motion effect A moves the first movable body 109SG401 from the retracted position to the effect position. , The second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to a position close to the first movable body moved to the effect position (the movable body unit 109SG400 is changed from the first state to the third state), and a plurality of movable bodies 109SG402L are moved. This is an effect in which the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S diffuses from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2. In the movable body motion effect B, the first movable body 109SG401 is moved from the retracted position to the effected position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R are moved to the close position of the first movable body moved to the effected position. It is an effect of moving (changing the movable body unit 109SG400 from the first state to the third state), and the display in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are diffused from the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V2 is not executed. This is different from the movable body motion effect A. Further, both the movable body motion effect A and the movable body motion effect B have in common that the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light at the brightness C1 during the execution period of the effect.

Next, a display mode of the reach effect on the image display device 5 in the variable display of the super reach α1, the super reach α2, the super reach β1, and the super reach β2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10-27 to 10-35.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-27 (A) and 10-27 (B), a while after the variable display of any one of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 is started, , The decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R stop at a combination indicating reach. Then, when a predetermined period elapses in the reach state, if the variable display is the variable display of the super reach α1, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character A is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (C). ) And FIG. 10-28 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach α2, the battle effect between the ally character A and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIG. 10-27 (D) and FIG. (See FIG. 10-30 (A)) If the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β1, a battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character A is started as a reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (E) and 10). -32 (A), if the variable display is the variable display of Super Reach β2, the battle effect between the ally character B and the enemy character B is started as the reach effect (FIGS. 10-27 (F) and 10-. 34 (A)).

At the start of the reach effect of these super reaches, the decorative symbols displayed in the "left" decorative symbol display area 5L and the "right" decorative symbol display area 5R are the upper left and right upper ends of the display area of the image display device 5. The decorative symbols displayed in the display area 5Cni of the "middle" decorative symbols are temporarily invisible.

As shown in FIGS. 10-28 (A) and 10-28 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect, which is the reach effect of the super reach α1, is approached, as shown in FIG. 10-28 (C), allies The display of the moving image in which the character A attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (C) to 10-28 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (D) to 10-28 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A are the first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-28 (A) to 10-28 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character A which have become these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (E) to 10-28 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character A are displayed at a display magnification of m3 over a predetermined period. Display with. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-29 (H) and 10-29 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. To.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (J) and 10-29 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 (at a lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-30 (A) and 10-30 (B), the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) as the reach effect of the super reach α2 is shown in FIG. 10-30 (C). As described above, the display of the moving image in which the ally character A attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-30 (C) to 10-30 (F), the ally character A is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (D) to 10-30 (F)), the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B are the first in the image display device 5. It is displayed with a lower contrast than before the enlarged display period (FIGS. 10-30 (A) to 10-30 (C)), and is duplicated in the images of the ally character A and the enemy character B having these low contrasts. , An image (movable body motion suggestion effect A) in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move at a speed V1 toward the first movable body 109SG401 is displayed. At this time, since the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed with the same contrast as before the first enlarged display period, the player can see that the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are the first movable body 109SG401 at a speed V1. It is easier to recognize how it moves toward.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-30 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character A and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-31 (G) to 10-31 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character A and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect A. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character B, and a plurality of star-shaped images are displayed so as to move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401, and the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed so as to move toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. To.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character A hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-31 (J) and 10-31 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character A and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 (at a lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-32 (A) and 10-32 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β1, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (C). Then, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character A is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (C) to 10-32 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character A, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (D) and 10-32 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-32 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (G) to 10-33 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B and the enemy are in the central portion of the image display device 5 as the movable body motion effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed overlapping the image of the character A.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character A on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J) and 10-33 (K), the attack of the enemy character A on the image display device 5 is an ally as an out-of-order notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 (at a lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-34 (A) and 10-34 (B), when the latter half of the battle effect (reach effect) is approached as the reach effect of the super reach β2, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (C). Then, the display of the moving image in which the ally character B attacks the enemy character B is started. In the moving image, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (C) to 10-34 (F), the ally character B is used as the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period described above. When a melee attack is to be applied to the enemy character B, the images of the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed.

In particular, in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is repeatedly executed as the movable body motion suggestion effect B (movable body unit). The change from the first state to the second state and the change from the second state to the first state of the 109SG400 are repeatedly executed).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (D) and 10-34 (E), the effect image 109SG005X is displayed on the image display device 5 during the enlarged display period of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A. The effect image 109SG005X emphasizes the enlarged display of the images of the ally character B and the enemy character A.

Further, during the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period, light emission at the brightness C1 of the movable body LED 109SG495 provided in the first movable body 109SG401 is also executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-34 (F), when the third enlarged display period has elapsed, the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed at the display magnification m3 over a predetermined period. During the predetermined period, the movable body LED109SG495 is not emitted.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (G) to 10-35 (I), when the variable display result is a big hit, the ally character B at the center of the image display device 5 is used as the movable body motion effect B. The explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed in duplicate with the image of the enemy character B, and a plurality of stars move from the center of the image display device 5 toward the edge of the image display device 5 at a speed V2. The type effect image 109SG005S is displayed.

Further, at this time, the first movable body 109SG401 moves from the retracted position to the effect position, and the second movable body 109SG402L and the third movable body 109SG402R move to the left and right close positions of the first movable body 109SG401 moved to the effect position. (The movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the first state to the third state). That is, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed behind the first movable body 109SG401.

After that, after the operation of each movable body is completed (after the movable body unit 109SG400 changes from the third state to the first state), the first movable body after the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 is completed. A movie in which the movement of the body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R to each retracted position is completed, the attack of the ally character B hits the enemy character B on the image display device 5, and the ally character A wins. Is executed, and it is notified that the jackpot game state is controlled. At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is displayed as a numerical value corresponding to the variable display result being a big hit. After moving at high speed from the back side to the front side of the device 5, the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

Then, when the variable display of the special symbol ends (the small symbol displayed at the right end of the image display device 5 stops at the combination indicating the jackpot), the jackpot game state is controlled.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is out of alignment, as shown in FIGS. 10-35 (J) and 10-35 (K), the attack of the enemy character B on the image display device 5 is an ally as an outlier notification effect. The display of the action of hitting the character B and defeating the ally character is executed, and the fact that the jackpot game state is not controlled (the fact that it is out of the game) is notified.
At this time, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol (the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C on the “right”) is slow as a numerical value according to the variable display result being out of alignment (FIG. After moving from above the image display device 5 (at a lower speed than the big hit shown in 10-29 (I)), the image display device 5 stops while swinging at the center of the image display device 5.

As described above, as shown in 10-31 to FIG. 10-35, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 109SG does not display the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. On the other hand, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5, so that the display of the explosion effect image 109SG005B enlarges the images of the ally character and the enemy character during the reach effect. Since the display and the effect of the movable body motion effect B by the movable body (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R) can be made more conspicuous, the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the effect of the effect in the enlarged display period can be improved by changing the enlargement speed of the image of each character between the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period. Since the operating speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is the same in the first enlarged display period and the second enlarged display period, the control load of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body operation effect can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period is slower than that of the first enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed is Since the enlargement speed is further slower than the second enlarged display period, the enlarged display of the images of the ally character and the enemy character is continued even after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, so that the game entertainment can be improved. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period is the fastest and the enlargement speed of the third enlarged display period is the slowest, but the present invention is not limited to this. (3) The enlargement speed of the enlarged display period may be the fastest, the enlargement speed of the first enlarged display period may be the slowest, or the enlargement speed of the second enlarged display period may be the fastest.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, since the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted during the reach effect including the enlarged display period, the player pays attention to the reach effect by executing the look-ahead notice effect. Can be prevented from decreasing. The feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is restricted over the entire execution period of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to this. The period for restricting the execution may be only a part of the reach effect (for example, only the first enlarged display period to the third enlarged display period). Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as a form for restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice effect, a form in which the look-ahead notice effect is not executed during the reach effect is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach is not limited to this. During the production, the look-ahead notice production may be executed at a lower rate than other periods.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the player can visually recognize the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect B, but as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35. In addition, during the execution of the movable body motion effect B, the visibility of the reach effect is reduced by displaying the explosion effect image 109SG005B on the image display device 5. That is, since the visibility of the reach effect effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) changes according to the operation status of the first movable body 109SG401, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 is used as the movable body operation suggestion effect. It is possible to easily understand whether it is an operation or an operation as a movable body operation effect, and it is possible to adjust the degree of attention of the first movable body 109SG401 and the effect image of the reach effect.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-23, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed, the BGM, SE, and motion suggestion sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed. Since the BGM, SE, and jackpot notification sounds are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, they are output from the speakers 8L and 8R before and after the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body operation effect. It is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect sound is changing.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the period T3 is longer than the period T1 required for one reciprocating movement between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401. Since the period T3 is shorter than the period T2 for executing the movable body motion suggestion effect, the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion effect is the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 in the movable body motion suggestion effect. It is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for it, and the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect becomes longer than the execution period of the movable body motion effect in the reach effect of the suggested target. The decrease can also be prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, by turning off the movable body LED109SG495 during the period from the end of the third enlarged display period to the start of the movable body operation effect or the detachment notification effect, the movable body LED109SG495 is turned off. During the period when is off, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the first movable body 109SG401 is not operating.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, in the movable body motion suggestion effect B, only the first movable body 109SG401 is operated, and as shown in FIGS. 10-33 and 10-35, the movable body is operated. In the motion effect B, all of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R are operated. It is possible for the player to easily distinguish whether the movement is also an action.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, during the first enlarged display period, the second enlarged display period, and the third enlarged display period, the movable body LED 109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C1 and the movable body operation effect is produced. Since the movable body LED109SG495 is made to emit light at the brightness C2, which is higher than the brightness C1, the brightness of the movable body LED109SG495 makes it easier for the player to recognize that the movable body operation effect is being executed. , The game entertainment during the execution of the movable body movement effect can also be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, while the movable body motion suggestion effect A is being executed, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5, and other reach effects are displayed. The effect image (the image of the ally character A and the enemy character A or the enemy character B) is displayed with a lower contrast than before the first enlarged display period, that is, the effect image of the reach effect during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Since the visibility of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is reduced, the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S can be made to stand out, and the player can be made to pay attention to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S at the speed V1. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 and 10-31, when the movable body motion effect A is executed, the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are faster than the speed V1 in the image display device 5. Since it is displayed so as to move from the first movable body 109SG401 toward the edge of the image display device 5, it is possible to make a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S stand out in the movable body motion effect A, and these Since the player can be made to pay attention to the first movable body 109SG401 by moving the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the speed V2, the effect of the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 can be enhanced. Can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 (F) and 10-30 (F), the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is hidden in the image display device 5 before the movable body motion effect A or the detachment notification effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the effect to be executed from now on is a movable body motion effect or an out-of-order notification effect.

Although the feature portion 109SG of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these feature portions, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. included.

For example, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) are the same, that is, , An example in which the start timing of the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 and the enlarged display start timing of the effect image (image of the ally character and the enemy character) of the reach effect are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period) may be different. In particular, when the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect is set before the start timing of the enlarged display period (first enlarged display period), the reciprocating operation of the first movable body 109SG401 as the movable body motion suggestion effect is performed. Can raise the attention of the player.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 after the end of the magnified display period and the display mode of the image on the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the magnified display period are substantially the same (the display magnification is slightly different). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, as the modified example 109SG-2, after the end of the enlarged display period, the image display device 5 displays a specific effect. The display mode of the image on the image display device 5 may be different from that of the image display device 5 immediately before the end of the enlarged display period by displaying the effect image or the like. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the enlarged display period has ended after the enlarged display period has ended.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the image display device 5 can display the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R during the reach effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as in the modified example 109SG-3, in the image display device 5, depending on the progress of the battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character executed as the reach effect. The effect image may be displayed.

In this way, when the image display device 5 can display both the explosion effect image 109SG005B according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, it corresponds to the movement of these movable bodies. The size of the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image of an appropriate size corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, so that the game entertainment can be improved. ..

Further, when the image display device 5 can display both the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion according to the movement of the movable body and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect, the effect of the explosion according to the movement of the movable body is possible. The image transparency of the image 109SG005B and the effect image according to the progress of the battle effect may be different. By doing so, the image display device 5 can display an effect image having an appropriate image transparency corresponding to the difference between the movement of the movable body and the battle effect during the reach effect, thus improving the game entertainment. it can.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the ally character and the enemy character are visually recognized in the image display device 5 during the period from the end of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the enlarged display period to the start timing of the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect. Although the form that does not change the sex is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-4, the movable body motion suggestion effect and the movable body motion effect or the disconnection notification after the end of the enlarged display period are completed. In the period until the start timing of the effect, the contrast and brightness of the image display device 5 are set to the first low visibility state, which is lower than before the end of the enlarged display period, so that the visibility of the ally character and the enemy character is reduced. You may let me. Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed (when the variable display result is a big hit), the contrast and the brightness in the image display device 5 are changed from the first low visibility state to the second low visibility state, which is further lower. The visibility of the ally character and the enemy character may be further reduced. By doing so, after the end of the enlarged display period, the player can easily recognize that the enlarged display period has ended due to the decrease in visibility of the ally character and the enemy character in the image display device 5. At the time of executing the movable body effect, attention to the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R can be raised.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-5, the moving body motion effect is being executed and the movable body is moving. The image display device 5 may display different effect images when the operation effect is being executed. In particular, the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is calculated from the number of types of effect images displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion effect. May be more. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of variations of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, so that the game entertainment at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect can be improved. ..

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 to 10-35, the same effect image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and during the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although the form of displaying (the same ally character and the enemy character) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modification 109SG-6, during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, While the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, while the image display device 5 displays the movable body motion suggestion effect. As the body motion effect compatible image, an image different from the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image may be displayed.

Further, when the image display device 5 can display the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image, the display period of the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the display period of the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image are set. It may be different. By doing so, the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image and the movable body motion suggestion effect compatible image are combined with the operation of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R (execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect). It is possible to display in an appropriate period corresponding to (whether it is the execution of the movable body motion effect).

Further, when the image display device 5 displays the image corresponding to the motion effect of the movable body, the visibility of the image corresponding to the motion effect of the movable body may be lowered by lowering the contrast and the brightness of the image display device 5. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the player's attention can be raised to the movable body motion effect instead of the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect.

Further, when displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect on the image display device 5, the speaker 8L8R outputs the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect, and the image display device 5 When displaying the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect, the speaker 8L8R may output the sound corresponding to the movable body motion effect corresponding to the image corresponding to the movable body motion effect. By doing so, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to each image displayed on the image display device 5 from the speakers 8L and 8R at the time of executing the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the time of executing the movable body motion effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect is being executed or the movable body motion effect is being executed.

Further, when the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect (when the variable display result is a big hit), the image display device 5 is movable from the timing before the start of the movable body motion effect. The display of the image corresponding to the body movement effect may be started. By doing so, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that the movable body movement effect is started during the reach effect of the super reach, and it is also possible to increase the attention to the movable body motion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, in the reach effect of the super reach α1 and the super reach α2, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are directed toward the first movable body 109SG401 in the image display device 5. Although the mode in which the display of moving at the speed V1 is executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as the modified example 109SG-7, the speed V1 is not a constant speed but within a predetermined range. It may be variable. In this case, for example, as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, when a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S move toward the first movable body 109SG401, the speed of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is set to the speed of the first movable body 109SG401. The speed is changed to a low speed (changes the speed V1 to a low speed) as it approaches. The speed V2 of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S at the time of executing the movable body motion effect A may be set to be faster than the maximum speed of the speed V1. By doing so, when the movable body motion suggestion effect A is executed, the moving speed (speed V1) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes, so that the game is improved. it can.

Further, the feature unit 109SG outputs a motion suggestion sound from the speakers 8L and 8R to 1 according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, and notifies the jackpot of the speakers 8L and 8R to 1 according to the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of outputting sound has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of sounds may be output as the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound output from these speakers 8L and 8R. ..

Further, in the case where a plurality of sounds can be output as the operation suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, a plurality of output start timings of the motion suggestion sound and the jackpot notification sound are provided, and the operation is performed at any timing. Different sounds may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R depending on whether the output of the suggestion sound or the jackpot notification sound is started. By doing so, the player can easily recognize that the movable body motion suggestion effect or the movable body motion effect is being executed by the sounds output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and can be made according to the output timing. Since these motion suggestion sounds and jackpot notification sounds change, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In particular, when the output timing of the operation suggestion sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the motion suggestion sound is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the output timing of the jackpot notification sound is determined from a plurality of timings, the output timing may be determined at different ratios according to the jackpot type and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In this case, since the player can pay attention to which timing the output of the jackpot notification sound is started, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first movable body 109SG 401 is moved at a constant speed between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. Although the form of reciprocating movement has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first movable body 109SG401 is reciprocated between the retracted position and the suggested position during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect. , The first movable body 109SG401 may be temporarily stopped at the retracted position and the suggested position, or the first movable body 109SG401 may be decelerated or accelerated at a position near the retracted position and the suggested position. By doing so, it is possible to prevent step-out from occurring in the first movable body motor 109SG421 for operating the first movable body 109SG401.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG 401 is made to stand by at the retracted position until the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect is started. The present invention is not limited to this, and after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, the first movable body 109SG401 is made to stand by at the suggested position until the movable body motion effect or the detachment notification effect is started. May be good. By doing so, when the movable body motion effect is executed, the first movable body 109SG401 can be immediately moved to the effect position, so that the game entertainment can be improved. Further, since the first movable body 109SG401 is maintained at the suggested position after the movable body motion suggestion effect is completed, it is possible to evoke a player's expectation that the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is set between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect. Although they are the same, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rising speed of the first movable body 109SG401 is different between the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect and the execution of the movable body motion effect. May be good.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIG. 10-20, update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and movable bodies (first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body). Although the embodiment in which the movement control of the 109SG402R) is executed based on the control timer is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 and the movable body are not limited to this. In addition to the movement control of the above, the lighting control of the LED provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the output control of the effect sound from the speakers 8L and 8R may be executed based on each dedicated control timer.

When executing the update control of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5, the movement control of the movable body, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound in this way, for example, for the effect control every 1 ms. The CPU 120 executes a timer interrupt (of the main processing of the effect control shown in FIG. 8, S73 to S77 are executed every 1 ms), the effect image update control is performed every 33 ms, the movable body movement control is performed every 1 ms, and the LED. The lighting control of the timer may be executed every 10 ms, and the output control of the effect sound may be executed every 1 ms. In particular, when executing the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound, the movement control of the movable body (motor 109SG421 for the first movable body, motor 109SG422 for the second movable body, for the third movable body) is always performed. Since the drive control of the motor 109SG423) is executed together, it is possible to preferably execute the movement control of the movable body, the update control of the effect image, the lighting control of the LED, and the output control of the effect sound.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are a plurality of light emitting modes of the movable body LED109SG495. The ratio of the movable body LED 109SG495 controlled to the jackpot gaming state may be different depending on which mode the movable body LED 109SG495 emits light during the execution of the movable body operation suggestion effect.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a form in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed on the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, but the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of display modes of the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 are provided as the movable body motion suggestion effect A, and the star-shaped effect image 109SG005S is displayed as the movable body motion suggestion effect A in any of the modes. The ratio controlled to the jackpot game state may be different depending on the game.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-25, the feature unit 109SG performs a reciprocating motion (movable body motion suggestion effect) between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG 401 during the third enlarged display period. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reciprocating motion between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 is executed even in the third enlarged display period. A case may be provided. In particular, in some cases where the variable display result is a big hit, the third enlargement can be performed by enabling the reciprocating operation between the retracted position and the suggested position of the first movable body 109SG401 in the third enlarged display period. Since the player can pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 109SG401 reciprocates between the retracted position and the suggested position during the display period, the game interest can be improved.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are moved toward the first movable body 109SG401 (movable body motion suggestion effect A), or the first movable body 109SG401 is moved between the retracted position and the suggested position. Although the embodiment suggesting the execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B by repeatedly moving the body (movable body motion suggestion effect B) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and these are specified. The execution of the movable body motion effect A or the movable body motion effect B may be suggested in an aspect other than the display of the image of the above and the operation of the first movable body 109SG401 itself. For example, when the first movable body 109SG401 is provided with an LED (movable body LED109SG495) as shown in the feature portion 109SG, the movable body operation effect A or the movable body operation depends on the lighting, blinking cycle, lighting color, etc. of the LED. It may suggest the execution of the effect B.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B in the image display device 5 as the movable body motion suggestion effect A. Although a mode in which a plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S are displayed (see FIGS. 10-28 (D) and 10-30 (D)) in a reduced state is illustrated, the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the movable body motion suggestion effect A is a timing before the image display device 5 reduces the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B (for example, FIG. 10-28 (C)). And the timing of FIG. 10-30 (C)), the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S may be started.

In this way, when the image display device 5 starts displaying the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S from a timing before the contrast between the image of the ally character A and the image of the enemy character A or the enemy character B is lowered, the display of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S is started. By increasing the transparency (transparency) of the plurality of star-shaped effect images 109SG005S, the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 (in the examples of FIGS. 10-28 and 10-30, the ally character A and the enemy character A) Alternatively, the image of the enemy character B) may be easier to see than when the contrast is lowered.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, as shown in FIGS. 10-29 (G) and the like, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is displayed on the image display device 5 and displayed on the image display device 5 when the movable body motion effect is executed. The present invention exemplifies a form in which a part of the effect image is invisible due to the effect image 109SG005B of the explosion, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an image is displayed when the movable body motion effect is executed. The explosion effect image 109SG005B or an image dedicated to the movable body motion effect may be displayed in the entire display area of the device 5, so that all the other effect images are invisible.

Further, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the movable body motion effect is executed during the reach effect of the super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of executing the movable body motion effect is not limited to this. The timing may be other than during the reach production of Super Reach. For example, as a modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (A), 10-36 (B), and 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (H), a combination of decorative symbols is used. It may be possible to execute the movable body motion effect during the period from the reach to the start timing of the reach effect of the super reach.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 10-36 (B), the movable body motion suggestion effect is first started after the reach is reached, and in the image display device 5, the reach effect to be executed after that is highly expected (big hit). Reach effect (for example, reach effect of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) and low expectation (big hit game state) Which of the reach effects (for example, the reach effects with lower expectations than the reach effects of super reach α1, super reach α2, super reach β1, and super reach β2 described in the feature unit 109SG) As a branching effect for notifying whether or not to branch to, the image of the character with the eyes closed is displayed. As the branching effect, as shown in FIG. 10-37 (C), during the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect. The character is gradually enlarged and displayed.

When the variable display is a variable display that executes a low-expected reach effect, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (C) to 10-37 (E). The display area of the image display device 5 gradually darkens without the character opening his eyes. That is, in the branch effect, the high-expectation reach effect is not executed (the low-expectation reach effect is executed) because the character displayed on the image display device 5 is darkened without opening the eyes. Be notified. Then, after the display area of the image display device 5 is completely darkened (after the branching effect is completed), the low-expected reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display that executes a reach effect with a high degree of expectation, it is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 10-37 (F) to 10-37 (H). It is notified that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed when the character is opening his eyes. At this time, the movable body motion effect is also executed. Then, after the movable body movement effect and the branch effect are completed, the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed.

That is, the movable body motion effect may be executed as an effect of notifying that the player is controlled to the jackpot game state as illustrated in the feature unit 109SG, but it is informed that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed. It may be executed as an effect of performing (an effect of notifying that the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state is high).

In this modified example 109SG-8, as shown in FIGS. 10-36 (B) and 10-37 (C), the character in the state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed in the image display device 5 as a branch effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a character in a state where the eyes are closed is gradually enlarged and displayed as a branching effect, the character is displayed on the image display device 5. At the same time, by displaying an effect image such as a concentrated line, the player may be able to pay attention to whether or not the character opens his eyes.

As described above, the feature unit 109SG exemplifies a mode in which the present invention is applied as a branch of whether or not the variable display result becomes a big hit during the reach effect of the super reach. As shown, the present invention may be applied as a branch of whether a low-expected reach effect or a high-expected reach effect is executed. In this case, the specific image in the present invention is a character image (the first specific image is the image of the character with the eyes closed, the second specific image is the image of the character with the eyes open), and the effect image in the present invention. Corresponds to the above-mentioned images such as concentrated lines.

As shown in FIGS. 10-36 and 10-37, in the present modification 109SG-8, when the movable body motion effect is executed as an effect for notifying that the reach effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, the movable body motion effect is executed. Although a mode in which the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed before the execution of the movable body motion suggestion effect is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body motion suggestion effect does not have to be executed. Further, the execution rate of the movable body motion effect may be different between the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is executed and the case where the movable body motion suggestion effect is not executed (the rate at which the high-expected reach effect is executed is different).

Further, although a plurality of feature portions and modified examples are disclosed in the present specification, the gaming machine of the present invention is implemented by combining two or more feature portions and modified examples from these plurality of feature portions and modified examples. You may.

Further, in the feature unit 109SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is exemplified as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine that plays a predetermined game is at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a slot machine or a general game machine may be used as long as it performs the above.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result.
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 109SG401, second movable body 109SG402L, third movable body 109SG402R)
A specific effect (for example, movable body motion effect A or movable body motion effect B) that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body and the movable body are repeatedly operated before the specific effect is executed. The effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the suggestion effect (for example, the movable body motion suggestion effect A and the movable body motion suggestion effect B) suggesting that the specific effect is executed is shown in the figure. The part that executes the effect processing during variable display shown in 10-19) and
With
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when the specific effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed (for example, FIG. 10-32 to FIG. 10-35). As described above, while the moving body motion suggestion effect B is being executed, the explosion effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5, while the explosive effect image 109SG005B is not displayed on the image display device 5 while the movable body motion suggestion effect B is being executed. The part that displays),
While executing the suggestion effect, the specific image is displayed and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, during the reach effect of the super reach β1. If so, the ally character B and the enemy character A are displayed, and the part where the ally character B and the enemy character A are enlarged and displayed, and the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach production of the super reach β2. The part that is displayed and the ally character B and the enemy character B are enlarged and displayed),
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image for the specific image can be displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 and 10-34, the image display device during the enlarged display period. 5), the part displaying the effect image 109SG005X),
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-9, the variable display of the super reach β2 in which the ally character B and the enemy character B are displayed during the reach effect is different from that of the ally character B during the reach effect. The part where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is higher than the variable display of Super Reach β1 where the enemy character A is displayed),
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image (for example, the movement control cycle of the first movable body 109SG401, the second movable body 109SG402L, and the third movable body 109SG402R is different. The update cycle of the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 is 33 ms, whereas it is 1 ms).
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display differs between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlargement). The part where the enlargement speed differs between the display period and the second enlarged display period),
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestion effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-21 to 10-24, the first enlarged display period and the second 2 The part where the operating speed of the movable body 109SG401 is the same during the enlarged display period),
further,
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
In the special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued.
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the effect image can make the enlarged display of the specific image and the effecting motion of the movable body more conspicuous, so that the game entertainment can be improved. In addition, it is possible to preferably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction.

In other words, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the effect image of the movable body more conspicuous, and at the same time, the first guidance display and the second guidance display are displayed in a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. By emphasizing the instruction to launch the game ball in the predetermined direction, and then instructing to take over the second guidance display and launch the game ball in the predetermined direction without taking over the first guidance display, the instruction is emphasized. It is possible not to feel annoyed by not overdoing it, and moreover, the second guidance display is first displayed to conservatively instruct to launch the game ball in a predetermined direction, and then the name of the advantageous state is recognized. After being recognized, it is possible to firmly instruct the game ball to be launched in a predetermined direction by the first guidance display. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy to attract the interest of the player when installed in the gaming field and that the instruction of the direction in which the gaming ball should be launched is easy to understand in an advantageous state.

Further, when displaying the specific effect or effect image and the guidance display at the same time, it is preferable to give priority to the guidance display. For example, by displaying the guidance display on the player side and displaying the specific effect or effect image on the rear side to ensure visibility, an appropriate guidance display becomes possible.

Further, when the movable body is operated during the display of the guidance display, the visibility of the guidance display may be lowered due to the duplication. In this case, it is preferable to display the guidance on a plurality of display screens. By doing so, even if the visibility of one guidance display is lowered, the visibility of the other can be maintained and an appropriate guidance display becomes possible.

Further, as another example of a gaming machine, which can improve the interest and can suitably execute an instruction for urging the player to launch the gaming ball in a predetermined direction, the display result of the variable display. Is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the specific display result.
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
An example is a gaming machine that continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed. A form example of this gaming machine will be described below as another form example.

<Explanation of feature 075F>
Next, the gaming machine according to the feature unit 075F of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-1 to 11-60.

[Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 related to feature section 075F, etc.]
It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which concerns on the feature part 075F of this embodiment. As shown in FIG. 11-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature unit 075F, a special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided instead of the special variable winning ball device 7 shown in FIG. The special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided with a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 11-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter, referred to as “)”. Usually referred to as a grand prize opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007A is provided in the space between the gaming board 2 located on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a located on the front side (player side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is equipped with a large winning opening door, and by sliding the opening and closing of the large winning opening door horizontally between the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the route to the normal large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Will be done. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the normal large winning opening, and the game ball enters the normal large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the normal large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the normal large winning opening is detected by the count switch 23 by passing through the area provided inside the normal large winning opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the game ball corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls for each detection) is paid out to the player as a prize ball. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches the upper limit number (for example, 10), one round is completed and the normal large winning opening is controlled to be closed.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a V variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 075F007A. The V variable winning ball device 075F007B includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 075F083 (see FIG. 11-4), and the large winning opening that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door (hereinafter referred to as “) Form a V-large winning opening).

For example, the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is provided with a large winning opening door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and the large winning opening door is located on the back side and the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. By sliding open and close in the horizontal direction between the spaces, the path to the V-large winning opening by the game ball is opened. Specifically, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the off state, the large winning opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to close the V large winning opening, and the game ball enters the V large winning opening. You will not be able to (pass). On the other hand, when the solenoid 075F083 is in the ON state, the large winning opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to open the V large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the V large winning opening. ..

The game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024 (see FIG. 11-4) by passing through a specific area (also referred to as a V prize area) provided inside the V prize opening. .. When the game ball is detected by the V winning switch 075F024, the game state is controlled to the probability change state. That is, in this embodiment, the V prize is generated on the condition that the game ball enters the V big prize opening during the round of the big hit game state, and the game state is controlled to the probable change state. .. In addition, the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. The big prize opening is also called an attacker.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps on the gaming board 2. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided above the attacker in addition to the movable body lamp 9d provided on the movable body 32 and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D provided at the lower left of the game board 2, the board right lamp 075F009F provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and the left side of the image display device 5 are provided. It is equipped with a board left lamp 075F009E.

The movable body lamp 9d has a character attached to the movable body 32 (for example, the title of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in this example) when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks when the movable body 32 is stopped or in an operating state. "XXX") is made to emit light. The attacker lamp 9c emits light in the vicinity of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The attacker upper lamp 075F009U emits light in the vicinity of the upper part of the attacker by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The lower left lamp 075F009D emits light in the vicinity of the lower left of the game board 2 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board right lamp 075F009F is a lamp provided in a housing imitating a character, and when a lighting means such as an LED lights up or blinks, the housing imitating the character on the right side of the image display device 5 is made to emit light. .. The panel left lamp 075F009E emits light near the left side of the image display device 5 by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED. The board left lamp 075F009E may be provided in a housing that imitates a character, similarly to the board right lamp 075F009F. Further, the panel right lamp 075F009F and the panel left lamp 075F009E may be movable in a predetermined direction (horizontal direction, vertical direction, etc.) like the movable body lamp 9d.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a plurality of lamps in the gaming machine frame 3. Specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a frame lamp composed of a frame left lamp 075F009L provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 and a frame right lamp 075F009R provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3. To be equipped.

Here, FIG. 11-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame lamp. The frame left lamp 075F009L has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp in a counterclockwise direction from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 075F009L emits light near the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 by lighting or blinking each of a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example). On the other hand, the frame right lamp 075F009R has 11 lamp groups of the first lamp to the eleventh lamp clockwise from the upper side to the lower side of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 075F009R lights or blinks a plurality of lamps (11 lamps in this example) to emit light in the vicinity of the right side of the gaming machine frame 3.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a special drawing LED board 075F020 at the lower left of the gaming board 2. The special figure LED board 075F020 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100, and the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and the ordinary symbol indicator 20, as shown in FIG. It is a substrate that plays the role of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a fourth symbol unit 075F050 at the lower left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is an LED substrate that is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 and notifies the fluctuation of the special figure, the number of reserved storages, the right-handed display, and the like by turning on / blinking / turning off the LED.

Here, FIG. 11-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the special figure LED substrate 075F020 and the fourth symbol unit 075F050. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (a), the special figure LED substrate 075F020 has a special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 showing the variable display of the first special figure and a special figure 2 variable showing the variable display of the second special figure. Display unit 075F022, special figure 1 storage display unit 075F023 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game, and special figure 2 storage display unit indicating the second reserved storage number corresponding to the second special figure game. 075F024, the normal figure storage display unit 075F025 indicating the number of reserved normal figures, the normal figure display unit 075F026 showing the variable display of the normal symbol, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 that urges the player to hit right. It is provided with a probability variation display unit 075F028 indicating the presence or absence of a jackpot, a time reduction display unit 075F029 indicating the presence or absence of a time reduction state, and a round display unit 075F027 indicating the number of jackpot rounds. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence or absence of variable display of a special figure or a normal symbol, the result, the current game state, the number of holds, etc. by lighting or blinking by a lighting means such as an LED. it can.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is performed and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of.

Further, the special figure LED substrate 075F020 can urge the player to strike right by turning on / blinking / extinguishing the right-handed display unit 075F030 by a lighting means such as an LED. In this embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, when the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F030 lights up (lights up) and does not urge the player to hit right. That is, when urging the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. After the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display lighting command to the effect control CPU 120, lights the right-handed display unit 075F030, and after the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, A right-handed display off designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120, and the right-handed display unit 075F030 is turned off. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F030 only during the big hit round. In this case, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command to the effect control CPU 120, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030.

Here, right-handed means firing a game ball toward the second flow path of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area provided in the game board 2. It is to operate the hitting ball operation handle 30 (how to hit). The first flow path is, for example, a path passing through the left region of the game area, and the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A exists ahead of the path, while the variable winning ball device is present. This is a route in which the second starting winning opening formed in 6B does not exist. The second flow-down route is, for example, a route that passes through the area on the right side of the game area, and beyond that, a second start winning opening or a large winning opening (usually a large winning opening) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. , V Grand Prize) is the route that exists. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path, the game ball flows through the first flow path toward the first start winning opening. When the player launches the game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path to the second start winning opening and the large winning opening (normal large winning opening, V large winning opening). Flow into. In this embodiment, in the big hit game after the big hit occurs and in the game state (time saving state or probability change state) after the big hit game, the player is provided on the right side of the game area by hitting right. The game ball is made to enter the second start winning opening and the large winning opening, and during that time, the right-handed display unit 075F030 urges the player to hit right. By hitting right while the display prompting the player to hit right is displayed, the player enters the game ball into the second start winning opening and pays out a predetermined number (for example, 3) of prize balls. The right to the second special figure game can be obtained, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls is paid out by inserting a game ball into the normal large prize opening. Further, as will be described in detail later, the V-large winning opening is opened during the round of the probabilistic jackpot, but the player hits the right while the display prompting the player to hit the right is displayed, so that the V-large winning opening is opened. It is also possible to obtain the right to enter the game ball into the winning opening and control it to a probabilistic state. For this reason, the player can have an overall advantage by hitting right while the display prompting him to hit right is being performed. It should be noted that, unlike right-handed hitting, operating the hitting ball operation handle 30 so as to launch the game ball toward the first opposite field path (hit method) is also referred to as left-handed hitting.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (b), the fourth symbol unit 075F050 corresponds to the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051 indicating the first reserved storage number corresponding to the first special figure game and the second special figure game. The special figure 2 storage display unit 075F052 showing the number of second reserved storages, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 showing the variable display status or display result of the first special figure, and the variable display status of the second special figure or A special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 showing a display result and a right-handed display unit 075F055 for urging the player to hit the right side are provided. Each display unit can notify the player of the presence / absence of variable display of the special figure, the number of holdings, the right-handed instruction, and the like by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 determines whether or not the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special figure game is performed, and the stop symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display. The player is notified by turning on / blinking / turning off by a lighting means such as an LED. The special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 sets the stop symbol of the second special symbol determined by whether or not the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is performed and the result of the variable display, such as an LED. The player is notified by lighting / blinking / extinguishing by the lighting means of. Hereinafter, expressing the fluctuation of the stop symbol of the first special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is also referred to as the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, expressing the change of the stop symbol of the second special symbol by the lighting means such as the LED in the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 is also referred to as the variation display of the second special symbol.

Further, in this embodiment, when urging the player to hit right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 lights up (lights up) and hits right. When not prompting the player, that is, when prompting the player to strike left, the lighting means such as the LED on the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off. The effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is confirmed, and the symbol is confirmed by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. After that, the right-handed display unit 075F055 is turned off based on the reception of the right-handed display / off designation command from the CPU 103. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled by the high base after the big hit game ball state, the effect control CPU 120 may turn on the right-handed display unit 075F055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the reception of the jackpot end designation command from the CPU 103.

FIG. 11-4 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 11-4, each of the movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L , It is connected to the lamp control board 14, and can be turned on (blinking) by the control of the effect control CPU 120 via the lamp control board 14. The movable body lamp 9d, the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker upper lamp 075F009U, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the board right lamp 075F009F, the board left lamp 075F009E, the frame right lamp 075F009R, and the frame left lamp 075F009L, or all of them are played together. Also referred to as effect lamp 9.

The fourth symbol unit 075F050 is connected to the effect control board 12, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the control CPU 120.

The special drawing LED board 075F020 is connected to the main board 11, and each display unit can be lit (blinking) under the control of the game control microcomputer 100.

[Image display device]
FIG. 11-5 is a front view of the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 constitutes a first display area 075F005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative patterns and reach effects. Further, the lower end of the image display device 5 displays the first hold storage display area 075F005D in which the first hold storage number can be displayed by the number of circular hold displays and the second hold storage number by the number of circular hold displays. It constitutes a second display area 075F005Sa including a possible second hold storage display area 075F005U.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 constitutes a fourth symbol 075F005J indicating that a special symbol is being variably displayed, and a third display area 075F005Sb including a display of the first reserved storage number and a display of the second reserved storage number. doing.

Of these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F, and variable display of decorative symbols can be executed. It has become. Further, a small symbol 075F005M having a size smaller than each decorative symbol is displayed at the left end of the first display area 075F005F. The small symbols are the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L on the "left", the decorative symbol displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5C in the "middle", and the decorative symbol display area on the "right". The symbols corresponding to each of the decorative symbols displayed on the 5R are arranged vertically. Further, the small symbol 075F005M is also a symbol that is not hidden during the variable display and is always displayed in the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 11-5, a decorative symbol is arranged in the center of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5, and the small symbol 075F005M is the left end of the first display area 075F005F of the image display device 5. It is arranged in a size smaller than the decorative pattern in the part. Therefore, the visibility of the small symbol 075F005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative symbol.

Further, in the lower center of the first display area 075F005F, an active display area 075F005A for displaying the hold display corresponding to the variable display being executed as the active display is provided.

[Various tables]
Various tables will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-6 to 11-8.

(Big hit type)
FIG. 11-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a hit type table. As shown in FIG. 11-6, in the hit type table, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state are shown for each type of hit in the jackpot. , And the number of open times (number of rounds) in the jackpot are shown.

Specifically, as the types of jackpots, 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpots, and 10R probability variation jackpots are provided. In the following, the marking of each round may be represented by "R". For example, the first round is also referred to as the 1R, and the second round is also referred to as the 2R. In the 5R normal jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize (for example, a control or lid that makes the time to open the lid for opening and closing the V jackpot shorter than a predetermined time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In a normal jackpot, the condition that such a low accuracy and high base state is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 fluctuation displays and the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 5R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are set from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 5 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

In the 10R probability variation jackpot, the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern that makes it easy to win a V prize (for example, the control to always open the lid that opens and closes the V jackpot and the time to open the lid are set from a specific time. It is a big hit that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the big hit game state of 10 rounds. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 150 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

The 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variable jackpot have a common decorative symbol that stops when a jackpot occurs. In addition, both the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot have the same fanfare effect (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) that are performed when the jackpot occurs, and during the round of the jackpot game state. (For example, the background, the characters appearing, the sound effects, etc.) are common to each other, and the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is also common to each other. For this reason, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the 5R normal jackpot or the 5R probability variation jackpot has occurred as far as the stopped decorative pattern, the fanfare effect, and the round effect are seen. Here, in the case of a 5R probability variation big hit, the V big winning opening is opened in a predetermined round (in this embodiment, the 4Rth). At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state.

As described above, in the 5R normal jackpot and the 5R probability variation jackpot, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the probability variation jackpot has occurred halfway through the round, so these jackpots are also referred to as chance bonuses.

As for the 10R probability variation jackpot, the V jackpot opens in the predetermined round (9Rth in this embodiment) as in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot. At this time, if the player can make the game ball enter the V-large winning opening by hitting right at the V-large winning opening, the gaming state is controlled to the probable change state. However, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, a decorative pattern that stops when a jackpot occurs, a fanfare production mode (for example, background, characters appearing, sound effects, etc.) and a round production performed during the round of the jackpot game state. The effect mode of is different from the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot. Therefore, when a 10R probability variation jackpot occurs, the player can recognize that the probability variation jackpot has occurred. Such a 10R probability variation jackpot is also referred to as a special bonus.

(Each random number)
FIG. 11-7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. As shown in FIG. 11-7, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, the random R is a random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. Random 1 is a random counter (for determining the jackpot type) that determines the jackpot type to be either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 10R probability variation jackpot. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of fluctuation pattern) that determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern. Random 3 is a random counter (for determining the fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Random 4 is a random counter (for determining whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol). Random 5 is a random counter that determines the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4).

In this embodiment, whether or not the jackpot gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous for the player is determined based on the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). Then, out of a plurality of types of jackpots such as 5R normal jackpot as a jackpot game state, 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10R probability variation jackpot, which jackpot is to be selected is based on the value of the random number for determining the jackpot type (random 1). It is determined. At this time, the jackpot symbol may also be determined based on the value of random 1.

First, the variation pattern type is determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 3), and any variation pattern included in the determined variation pattern type is used using the variation pattern determination random number (random 4). Is determined. As described above, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by the two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type.

For example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is classified into a normal reach fluctuation pattern type with normal reach and a super reach fluctuation pattern type with super reach. Such fluctuation pattern types are selected at a predetermined ratio. Further, in the case of loss, it is classified into a normal fluctuation pattern type, which is a fluctuation pattern type without reach, a normal reach fluctuation pattern type, and a super reach fluctuation pattern type.

In such a fluctuation pattern type, when the display result is lost, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type differs between the time saving state and the non-time saving state (in the time saving state, compared with the case where the time saving state is not obtained). Therefore, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type with a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set high), so that when the time is shortened, compared to when the time is not shortened. Therefore, the variable display time is shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

(Big hit judgment table, big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 11-8 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

FIG. 11-8 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in RO101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change state) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 11-8 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value in the normal jackpot determination table, and the right of FIG. 11-8 (B) is set in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Each numerical value described in the column is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot determination value, a larger number of jackpot determination values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot determination value or the second jackpot determination value) than the probability variation jackpot determination table are set. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 11-8 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in) is matched, it is decided to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 11-8 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of becoming a big hit.

11-8 (B) and 11-8 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11-8 (B) is a first special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining a jackpot type when a jackpot is determined by the first special symbol. FIG. 11-8 (C) is a second special figure jackpot type determination table used for determining the jackpot type when it is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol.

In the first special figure jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8 (B), numerical values to be compared with the random 1 value for jackpot type determination, such as "5R normal jackpot", "5R probability variation jackpot", and , The jackpot determination value corresponding to each of "10R probability variation jackpot" is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 11-8 (C), a jackpot determination value corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is set, which is a numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and 11-8 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Be done. For example, the determination value corresponding to "5R normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "1" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to "5R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol. The determination value corresponding to "10R probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol. The special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 on the special figure LED board 075F020 display a stopped big hit symbol by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. Can be shown. Similarly, the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F053 and the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F054 in the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are stopped by lighting or blinking a lighting means such as an LED in a lighting mode corresponding to each jackpot symbol. A jackpot symbol can be shown.

Using such various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1 value matches as the jackpot type, and the random 1 value matches as the jackpot symbol. Determine the jackpot design you made. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

According to such various jackpot type determination tables, the percentage of "10R probability variation jackpot" selected for the jackpot of the second special symbol is higher than that of the jackpot type that can be selected in the first special symbol, and the player The percentage of jackpot types that are advantageous to the player is high.

(Direction control command)
FIG. 11-9 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command. The game control microcomputer 100 transmits various effect control commands to the effect control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The command form shown in FIG. 11-9 is an example, and other command forms may be used. In the following, "(H)" is shown to be a hexadecimal number, but may be omitted in the present specification.

The command 8001 (H) is a first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display of the first special figure. The command 8002 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of the variable display of the second special figure. Upon receiving the command 8001 (H) or the command 8002 (H), the effect control CPU 101 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The command 81XX (H) is a variation pattern command for designating the variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variablely displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number.

The command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (loss designation command) indicating that the command is determined to be lost. The command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (5R normal jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R normal jackpot is determined. The command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (5R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 5R probability variation jackpot is determined. The command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (10R probability variation jackpot designation command) indicating that the 10R probability variation jackpot is determined. Loss designation command, 5R normal jackpot designation command, 5R probability variation jackpot designation command, and 10R probability variation jackpot designation command, or these are collectively referred to as 8C system commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special figure is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special figure is started. Each of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D system commands. The command 8F00 (H) is a symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variation of the first special figure and the second special figure.

The command 9000 (H) is an initialization specification command for designating the initialization (designating to display the initial screen at the time of turning on the power) to be transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is a power failure recovery designation command for designating the power failure recovery (designating to display the power failure recovery screen) transmitted when the power supply for the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state specification command for designating the background of the normal state. The command 9501 (H) is a time saving state specification command for designating the background of the time saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a probability change state specification command for designating the background of the probability change state. Each of the normal state specification command, the time saving state specification command, and the probability change state specification command, or these are collectively referred to as a 95 series command or a background specification command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of a 5R normal jackpot. The command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A003 (H) is a probability variation jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot start 1 designated command, the jackpot start 2 designated command, and the jackpot start 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for designating the opening of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The command specified while the large winning opening is open is also referred to as an A1 command. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. The designated command after opening the big prize opening is also called an A2 command.

The command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of the 5R normal jackpot. The command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of the 5R probability variation jackpot. The command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command for designating the end of the 10R probability variation jackpot. Each of the jackpot end 1 designated command, the jackpot end 2 designated command, and the jackpot end 3 designated command, or these are collectively referred to as A3 series commands.

The command AD00 (H) is a probability variation determination device pass designation command that specifies that a V prize has occurred. The probability variation determination device pass designation command is a command transmitted when a game ball that has passed through the V large winning opening enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 075F024.

The command B100 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command B200 (H) is a second start prize designation command for designating that there was a second start prize.

The command C1XX (H) is a first hold storage number designation command for designating that the first hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C1 system command. The command C2XX (H) is a designated command for second hold storage that specifies that the second hold storage number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second hold storage number designation command is also referred to as a C2 system command.

The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) display the contents of the winning judgment results such as the big hit judgment, the big hit type judgment, and the variable pattern type judgment at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. This is an effect control command to be shown. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

C7XX (H) is a large winning opening winning designation command indicating the passage of the game ball to the large winning opening of the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-handed display off-designated command indicating that the right-handed display is turned off. The command in which the MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of the EXT data is 1, is a right-handed display lighting designation command indicating lighting of the right-handed display. In this embodiment, the right-handed display lighting designation command is also referred to as an FD command.

The game control microcomputer 100 determines whether or not a big hit is obtained, the type of the big hit, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type in the EXT data of the variation type command, and controls transmission to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, the type of the big hit, and can recognize the fluctuation pattern type based on the fluctuation type command. ..

[motion]
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described. First, processing by the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special design normal processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. As shown in FIG. 11-10, in the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 uses the first reserved storage buffer (storage buffer for storing the reserved storage information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved storage buffer (second special). It is determined whether or not there is hold storage data in the storage buffer for storing the hold storage information of the symbol (step 075FS001). When there is no hold storage data in either the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (N in step 075FS001), it is determined whether or not a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (step 075FS002). If a predetermined period does not elapse from the suspension of fluctuation (N in step 075FS002), the special symbol normal processing is terminated. On the other hand, when a predetermined period has elapsed from the suspension of fluctuation (Y in step 075FS002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step 075FS003), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been sent is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer is repeated based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is set. It is controlled not to send the wait demo specification command. Such a customer waiting demo designation command sent flag is reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

When there is hold storage data in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer (Y in step 075FS001), the CPU 103 indicates that the first data among the data set in the hold specific area indicates "second". It is determined whether or not the data is data (step 075FS004). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not the data indicating the "second" (that is, the data indicating the "first") (N in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (third). Data indicating "first" is set in (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol) (step 075FS005). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is the data indicating "second" (Y in step 075FS004), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" in the special symbol pointer (step 075FS006). ).

In this embodiment, hereinafter, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special are performed according to whether the data indicating the "first" is set or the data indicating the "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. The variable display of the symbol is executed using a common processing routine. When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the first special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the first reserved storage buffer. On the other hand, when the data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation display of the second special symbol is performed based on the reserved storage data stored in the second reserved storage buffer.

Under the control of steps 075FS004 to 075FS006, if even one data of the second reserved storage exists in the second reserved storage buffer, the variation display of the second special symbol based on the data of the second reserved storage is displayed. 1 Priority is given to the variable display of the first special symbol based on the data in the hold storage.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102 (step 075FS007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the hold storage buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 075FS008). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 is placed in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage buffer of the RAM 102. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the hold storage number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control CPU 120 based on the value of the hold storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after subtraction (). Step 075FS009). In this case, when a value indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first hold storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the second hold storage number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (step 075FS010), reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the hold storage buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step 075FS011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 11-8) with a random number for jackpot determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state (high probability state), the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal gaming state and time saving state). ing. Specifically, the number of jackpot judgment values is probablely changed between the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 11-8 (A) is set) in which a large number of jackpot judgment values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 11-8 (A) is set), which is set less than the hour jackpot determination table, is provided. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. In the state or the time saving state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 11-8 (A), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS012. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but it also means deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol in the special symbol a big hit symbol. ..

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, the probability change flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game, and then either the condition that the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (150 times) or the condition that the next jackpot is determined. When the earlier condition is satisfied, the change display of the special symbol is ended and the stop symbol is reset at the timing of the stop display.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step 075FS011), the process proceeds to step 075FS016 described later.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values in step 075FS011, the CPU 103 sets the big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 075FS012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 11-8 (B) and the second table in FIG. 11-8 (C). One of the special symbol jackpot type determination tables is selected (step 075FS013). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-8 (B). Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-8 (C).

Next, the CPU 103 reads out the jackpot type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and holds them using the jackpot type determination table selected in step 075FS013. The jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type stored in the storage buffer are determined (step 075FS014).

As shown in FIGS. 11-8 (B) and 11-8 (C), for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the relationship between the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol is set so that the jackpot symbol differs for each jackpot type. Since the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol are determined at the same time, the correspondence between the jackpot symbol and the game control according to the jackpot type is simplified, so that the game control can be prevented from becoming complicated.

Further, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 075FS015). For example, when the jackpot type is "5R normal jackpot", "01" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "5R probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the jackpot type data. When the jackpot type is "10R probability variation jackpot", "03" is set as the jackpot type data.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a stop symbol of the special symbol (step 075FS016). Specifically, when the jackpot flag is not set, "-", which is a lost symbol, is set as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, the jackpot symbol determined in step 075FS014 is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "5R normal jackpot", "1" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "5R probability variation jackpot", "3" is set as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot type is determined to be "10R probability variation jackpot", "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a display result designation command (step 075FS017), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S111) (step 075FS018).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 11-11 is a flowchart showing an example of the fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIGS. 11-11, in the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the variation pattern (step 075FS101). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern type determination table according to the jackpot type when the jackpot flag is set, and when the jackpot flag is not set, the loss pattern variation pattern. Select the type judgment table. Then, the CPU 103 reads random number 2 (random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and refers to the selected table to select any one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types. To decide.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS102).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step 075FS103). Then, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS104), and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (S112) (step 075FS105). ).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 11-12 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in FIG. 11-11, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step 075FS201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step 075FS202), sets the value of the special symbol process flag. The value is updated to correspond to the special symbol stop processing (S113) (step 075FS203). If the fluctuation time timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS202), the process ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 11-13 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 11-13, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets the end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and stops at the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 or the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022. Control is performed to derive and display the symbol (step 075FS301). When the data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol in the special diagram 1 variable display unit 075F021 is terminated, and the special symbol pointer indicates "second". When the data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is terminated. In addition, a symbol confirmation designation command is set in the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS302). As a result, the symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 075FS303). Then, if the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the process proceeds to step 075FS309.

When the jackpot flag is set (Y in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag (step 075FS304). Next, a jackpot start designation command and a right-handed display lighting command are transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS305).

In addition, referring to the opening pattern data stored in RO101, the number of opening times (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval between rounds are obtained for the normal large winning opening and the V large winning opening. Data indicating an opening mode such as an interval time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set in a predetermined storage area (step 075FS306). Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, an opening mode for opening the normal jackpot in all of 1 to 5R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal big winning opening is opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R and the V big winning opening is opened at the 4th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. Further, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, an opening mode in which the normal big winning opening is opened at the 1st to 8th Rs and the 10th R and the V big winning opening is opened at the 9th R is stored in a predetermined storage area provided in the RAM 102. The data of the number of times of opening (5 times or 10 times) is set in the number of times of opening counter for counting the number of times of opening.

Further, a value corresponding to the fanfare time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the image display device 5), which is the jackpot display time, is set in the jackpot control timer (step 075FS307). After that, in the big hit opening pre-processing, the big winning opening control timer is subtracted by 1, and when it becomes 0, the big winning opening is opened and the round is started. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (step 075FS308), and the processing is terminated.

When it is determined in step 075FS303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 075FS303), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS309). .. If the time saving flag is not set (N in step 075FS309), the process proceeds to step 075FS316. When the time saving flag is set (Y in step 075FS309), the counter value of the time saving number counter indicating the number of remaining fluctuations in the time saving state is subtracted by 1 (step 075FS310). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter has become 0 (step 075FS311). When the value of the time reduction counter becomes 0 (Y in step 075FS311), it is determined that the duration of the time reduction state has expired, and the time reduction flag is reset (step 075FS312). As a result, the gaming state shifts from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the variable display resulting in the loss display result is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state. If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0 in step 075FS311 (N in step 075FS311), the process proceeds to step 075FS316.

After step 075FS312, it is determined whether or not the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set (step 075FS313). If the probability change flag is set (Y in step 075FS313), the probability change flag is reset (step 075FS314). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS315) in response to the transition of the game state from the time saving state to the normal state (low probability / low base state), and in step 075FS316. move on. If the probability change flag is not set in step 075FS313 (N in step 075FS313), the process proceeds to step 075FS315 without performing the process of step 075FS314. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (S110) (step 075FS316), and the processing is terminated.

(Big hit pre-opening treatment)
FIG. 11-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot opening preprocessing. As shown in FIG. 11-14, in the jackpot opening preprocessing, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS401). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (step 075FS402), and if the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS402), the process ends.

When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS402), a command indicating that the large winning opening is open is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the normal large winning opening (step 075FS404). As a result, the large winning opening is usually opened in the 1st round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the maximum time during which the large winning opening can be opened (large winning opening opening time) by the large winning opening control timer based on the opening pattern data (for example, the data stored in the RAM 102 by step 075FS306). The corresponding large winning opening opening time (29 seconds) is set (step 075FS405). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS406), and the process ends.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
FIG. 11-15 is a flowchart showing an example of processing during jackpot opening. As shown in FIG. 11-15, in the jackpot opening process, the CPU 103 sets the value of the jackpot control timer by -1 (subtraction update) (step 075FS501).

Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the large winning opening control timer has become 0 (step 075FS502). When the value of the large winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS501), the process proceeds to step 075FS511. When the value of the large winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS502), it is determined whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is being opened (step 075FS503). Whether or not the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open may be determined by the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step 075FS503 that the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is not open (N in step 075FS503), the process ends.

If the normal large winning opening or the V large winning opening is open (Y in step 075FS503), it is determined whether or not the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (N in step 075FS504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (Y in step 075FS504), the winning number counter is incremented by +1 (addition update) (step 075FS505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS506). The probability change determination flag is a flag set when it is determined that the probability change state is controlled when a V prize is generated. If the probability change determination flag is set (Y in step 075FS506), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 075F024 is turned on (step 075FS507). If the V winning switch 075F024 is not turned on (N in step 075FS507), the process proceeds to step 075FS510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is turned on (Y in step 075FS507), the probability variation determination flag is set (step 075FS508), the probability variation determination device pass designation command is transmitted (step 075FS509), and the process proceeds to step 075FS510. To do.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 075FS510). If the value of the winning number counter does not reach a predetermined number (N in step 075FS510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step 075FS510), the CPU 103 controls to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large winning opening, or drives the solenoid 075F083 to drive the V large winning opening. One of the controls for closing the solenoid is controlled (step 075FS511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process of clearing (setting to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step 075FS512). Next, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release post-processing (S116) (step 075FS513), and ends the processing.

(Post-processing after opening the jackpot)
FIG. 11-16 is a flowchart showing an example of post-processing after opening the jackpot. As shown in FIGS. 11-16, in the jackpot opening post-processing, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the opening count counter is 0 (step 075FS601).

If the value of the open count counter is 0 (Y in step 075FS601), the jackpot end designation mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS602), and the jackpot end time (the jackpot game is completed) is sent to the jackpot control timer. For example, a value corresponding to (time to be notified in the image display device 5) is set (step 075FS603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (S117) (step 075FS604), and the process is performed. To finish.

In step 075FS601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step 075FS601), a designated mand is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening (step 075FS605), and a round is sent to the large winning opening control timer. A value corresponding to the interval time from the end to the start of the next round is set (step 075FS606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the round before the V open winning opening (also referred to as the V open round), that is, the next round is the V open round (step 075FS607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step 075FS607), the solenoid 82 is driven to control the normal opening of the large winning opening (step 075FS608). On the other hand, when it is before the V opening round (Y in step 075FS607), the solenoid 075F083 is driven to control the opening of the V large winning opening (step 075FS609).

After step 075FS608 or step 075FS609, the CPU 103 transmits a designated mand during the opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS610). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (S115) (step 075FS611), and ends the process.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 11-17 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end processing. As shown in FIG. 11-17, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer for which the jackpot end time is set (step 075FS701). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed) (step 075FS702). If the value of the winning opening control timer is not 0 (N in step 075FS702), the process ends. If the value of the big winning opening control timer is 0 (Y in step 075FS702), the big hit flag is reset (step 075FS703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the probability variation determination flag set by passing through the V winning area is set (step 075FS704). If the probability change determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), the process proceeds to step 075FS705. If the probability variation determination flag is set in step 075FS704 (Y in step 075FS704), the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set (step 075FS707). Next, a probability change state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS708), the probability change determination flag is reset (step 075FS709), and the process proceeds to step 075FS710.

In step 075FS710, a time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step 075FS710), and 150 is set in the time saving number counter (step 075FS711). Then, the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

On the other hand, in step 075FS704, if the probability variation determination flag is not set (N in step 075FS704), in step 075FS705, the time reduction flag indicating that the time is shortened is set (step 075FS705), and 100 is set in the time reduction counter. (Step 075FS706), and the process proceeds to step 075FS712.

In step 075FS712, a time saving state designation command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 075FS712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S110) (step 075FS713), and ends the process. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 side can recognize which of the probabilistic change, the time saving, and the normal gaming state is in the probabilistic change state specification command transmitted from the CPU 103.

(Production processing during big hit)
Next, the processing by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during the big hit. As shown in FIG. 11-18, in the big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag is set (step 075FS651). Here, flags such as the jackpot end designation command reception flag are set by the effect control CPU 120 when the data indicating that the jackpot end designation command has been received is stored in the command reception buffer formed in the ROM 121, and the jackpot ends are set. It is erased at a predetermined timing such as when the game ends.

When the jackpot end designation command reception flag is not set (N in step 075FS651), the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 075FS652).

Next, it is determined whether or not the process timer has timed out (step 075FS653). When the process timer times out (Y in step 075FS653), the process data is switched (step 075FS655). Then, the process timer is started again by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer (step 075FS656). Further, the control of the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is executed according to the content of the process data set next (step 075FS657). For example, the effect control CPU 120 reads the image data from the ROM 121 according to the contents of the process data and outputs the read image data to the image display device 5 in order to display the image corresponding to the effect during the round on the image display device 5. .. Further, a control signal is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control lighting / blinking / extinguishing of various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. Further, in order to cause the speakers 8L and 8R to output voice, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the voice control board 13. Then, the process ends.

If the process timer has not timed out (N in step 075FS653), the effect device (image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamp 9, etc.) is continuously controlled according to the set process data contents. (Step 075FS654). Then, the process ends.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the above-mentioned process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. For example, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a jackpot, the process corresponding to the fanfare effect is to execute the fanfare effect under the control of the effect device. Set the data. Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the right-handed display lighting command from the CPU 103 based on the occurrence of a big hit, the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 is used to urge the player to right-handed. A lighting means such as an LED is turned on.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the big winning opening opening designated command (A1 system command) from the CPU 103 at the start of each big hit round, the effect control device executes the effect during the round as follows. In order to do so, set the process data corresponding to the production during the round.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of a 5R normal jackpot, it executes a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot. Set the process data of. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 5R normal jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the jackpot opening designation command (A102). The jackpot round (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability variation suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

The process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIG. 11-41) when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A102 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 2R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. To set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A102). The jackpot round (2R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V probability variation suggestion effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A103 command) during the opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of the 3R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the V notice that the next 4R is the V open round is announced. Process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 11-42) is set. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A103). The jackpot round (3R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening from the CPU 103 after 3R of the 5R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V large winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 11-43) aiming at the V that aims at the thing. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A203). The jackpot round (3R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set. The effect aiming at V is a guidance display using an image display relating to the V large winning opening, which is a specific area. Specifically, in the production aiming at V, an image urging the player to hit right is displayed so as to shoot the game ball aiming at the V large winning opening which is a specific area. In the production aiming at V, an image pointing to the V large winning opening itself, which is a specific area, may be displayed, or an image pointing to the vicinity of the V large winning opening, which is a specific area, may be displayed. , An image may be displayed that points to the route leading to the V-large winning opening, which is a specific area.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the special winning opening opening designated command (A104 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of the 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 continues to aim at V and execute the effect (see FIGS. 11-44). Set the process data for. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 5R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A104). The jackpot round (in this case, 4R) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

When the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A108 command) during opening of the big winning opening from the CPU 103 at the start of 8R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 performs a V advance notice effect to announce that the next 9R is the V open round. Set the process data to execute. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A108). The jackpot round (8R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the V notice effect) according to the specified jackpot round is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a designated command (A208 command) after opening the big winning opening from the CPU 103 after 8R of the 10R probability variation big hit, the game ball is made to enter the V big winning opening which is a specific area between rounds. Set the process data to execute the production aiming at V that aims at that. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and also specifies the command after opening the jackpot (A208). The jackpot round (8R in this case) that has ended based on the command) is specified, and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aimed at V) corresponding to the round after the specified jackpot is set.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a command (A109 command) from the CPU 103 at the start of 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, the process data for continuously aiming at V and executing the effect is set. .. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the type of jackpot (in this case, the 10R probability variation jackpot) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) that has already been received, and the jackpot open designation command (A109). The big hit round (9R in this case) is specified based on the command), and the process data for executing the effect (in this case, the effect aiming at V) according to the specified round during the big hit is set.

Further, when the output control CPU 120 receives the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) from the CPU 103 during the jackpot round, the output control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect under the control of the effect device as shown below. Set the process data corresponding to the production.

The effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIGS. 11-44) when the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) is received from the CPU 103 during the 4R of the 5R probability variation jackpot. ..

When the effect control CPU 120 receives the probability variation determination device passage designation command (AD00) from the CPU 103 during the 9R of the 10R probability variation jackpot, it sets the process data for executing the V winning effect.

In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) from the CPU 103 based on the end of the jackpot game state, the effect control CPU 120 has an ending effect (FIGS. 11-46, FIG. -47) Set the process data to execute.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 controls various effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 by setting process data based on the effect control command received from the CPU 103. Perform the production of.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. Regarding the content of the game played in the basic pachinko gaming machine 1 already described, the pachinko gaming machine 1 related to the feature unit 075F has the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the game of the part related to the feature unit 075F will be described below. To do.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the player first hits the left side to launch the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the area on the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game is started. As a result of the first special figure game, when the special figure 1 variable display unit 075F021 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit occurs.

As described above, the types of jackpots in the first special figure game include 5R normal jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpots, and 10R probability variation jackpots. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to strike right is executed. As a right-handed promotion effect, characters (for example, "right-handed") and figures (for example, an arrow directed to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) that encourage right-handedness are displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In addition to displaying an image, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also promote right-handedness by lighting, for example, a lighting means such as an LED. As a result, the player will hit right after that.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times in the case of 5R normal jackpot and 5R probability variation jackpot, and 10 times in the case of 10R probability variation jackpot). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

In the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal big winning opening is open at the 1st to 3rd R and the 5th R, but the V big winning opening is open only at the 4th R. However, since the control pattern of the distribution member (not shown) in the attacker is a control pattern in which it is difficult to win a V prize, the V prize is not won. Further, since the V prize is not won, the effect of aiming at V is not executed at the 4th R, and the same background image as the 1R is displayed. Specifically, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and at the 2nd round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the hit is a probability variation jackpot is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability variation suggestion effect, it is notified that it is a normal jackpot instead of a probability variation jackpot. After that, the V prize opening is opened on the 4th R, but the V prize does not occur, and the normal large winning opening is opened on the subsequent 5R, and the ending effect is executed when the 5R is completed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 3rd Rs and the 5th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 4th R. Specifically, in the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot, as in the case of the 5R normal jackpot, the normal jackpot opens at the 1st and 2nd rounds, and the V probability variation suggests whether or not the 2R is a probability variation jackpot. Suggestion production is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 3rd round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 4th round is a V open round is executed. In the 4th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 5th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 5th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

In the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th R. Specifically, in the case of a 10R probability variation jackpot, the normal jackpot is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds, and at the 7th round, a V probability variation suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the probability variation jackpot is executed is executed. Then, as a result of the V probability change suggestion effect, it is notified that the probability change jackpot. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

When the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to the time saving state over a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the case of 5R normal big hit and 150 times in the case of 5R probability change big hit and 10R probability change big hit). Will be done. Further, in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 10R probability variation jackpot, and when a V prize occurs during the jackpot round, the gaming state is in the probability variation state over a predetermined number of times (150 times) fluctuations controlled in the time saving state. Is controlled by. That is, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes the low accuracy high base state, and in the case of the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 10R probability variation jackpot, the gaming state after the jackpot round becomes the high accuracy high base state.

Even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit round, the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 continue to execute the right-handed promotion effect. For this reason, the player is always urged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect even in the time-saving state after the big hit round is completed after the first big hit (also referred to as the first hit) occurs.

In the time saving state, control is executed to shorten the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) from the normal state, and the average normal figure fluctuation time (period in which the normal figure is changed) is executed. Is executed to shorten the time from the normal state, and further, the control to improve the probability of "hit the normal figure" in the normal state game is executed. Further, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B forming the second starting winning opening is opened more frequently, so that the game ball enters the second starting winning opening more frequently and the second start is started. Electric chew support control may be performed to facilitate winning a prize in the winning opening (higher entry, higher frequency).

In the time saving state after the big hit round, the second special figure game is started by the launched game ball entering the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. As a result of the second special figure game, when the special figure 2 variable display unit 075F022 is in a display mode showing a big hit symbol, a big hit (also referred to as a continuous chan hit) occurs.

As a type of jackpot in the second special figure game, as described above, there is a 10R probability variation jackpot. When a big hit occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 has continued since the first hit.

During the round of the jackpot game state, the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). One opening of the big winning opening is between the elapsed timing of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). It will continue until the earlier timing.

Since it is a 10R probability variation jackpot, the big winning opening is normally opened at the 1st to 8th R and the 10th R, but the V big winning opening is opened only at the 9th R. Specifically, as in the case of the first hit, the normal large winning opening is opened at the 1st to 7th rounds. Then, in the subsequent 8th round, a V notice effect for notifying that the next 9th round is a V open round is executed. In the 9th round, when the V prize opening is opened and the game ball that has entered the V prize opening is detected by the V prize switch 075F024, the V prize is generated. As a result, the player is given the right to control the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round to the probabilistic state. After that, at the 10th round, the normal large winning opening is opened again, and when the 10th round is completed, the ending effect is executed.

Then, when the ending effect after the big hit game state is completed, the game state is controlled to a time saving state and a probability change state (high accuracy and high base state) over a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 150 times) as in the case of the first hit. Will be done. Even in the probable change state after the big hit round in the continuous chan, the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 continue to execute the right-handed promotion effect. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, the player will be hit by consecutive chans in the probabilistic state or time saving state after the jackpot round is completed, and the player will be in the probabilistic state or time saving after the jackpot round per consecutive chan is finished. Even in the state, you are always encouraged to hit right by the right-handed promotion effect.

The probabilistic state or time saving state after the big hit round of the first hit ends, and the probabilistic state or time saving state ends without a big hit occurring in either the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit round per consecutive chan ends. Then, the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), and the right-handed promotion effect by the image display device 5, the right-handed display unit 075F030, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 is also completed. As a result, the player launches the game ball toward the first flow path passing through the left area of the game area by hitting the left again.

[Timing chart of an example of processing]
The timing of the main processing executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-19 to 11-21. FIG. 11-19 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the hit fluctuation. FIG. 11-20 is a timing chart showing an example of processing during the jackpot. FIG. 11-21 is a timing chart showing an example of processing after the end of the jackpot. It should be noted that FIGS. 11-19 to 11-21 show the timing of processing when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-19, at t1, when the first special figure game is started by the game ball entering the first start winning opening, the CPU 103 issues a hold storage number designation command to the effect control CPU 120. (C1 system command), background specification command (95 system command), symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the first special symbol, and the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the first special symbol (for example, reach effect, notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute.

For example, the effect control CPU 120 updates the display of the first hold storage display area 075F005D by specifying the first hold storage number based on the hold storage number designation command, or the lighting mode of the special figure 1 storage display unit 075F051. To update. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 so as to display a background image or the like corresponding to the game state by specifying the game state being controlled based on the background designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 identifies that the special symbol variation starts based on the symbol variation designation command, and sets the effect start timing. Further, the effect control CPU 120 specifies the presence / absence of a big hit and the type of the big hit based on the display result designation command, and determines the decorative pattern according to the identification. Further, the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution time of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the effect content during the variable display of the decorative pattern (reach) based on the variable pattern designation command. Set the type of production, etc.).

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped at t2, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

When a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 issues a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command) to the effect control CPU 120 at t3 thereafter. Send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the fanfare effect, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image congratulating the big hit on the image display device 5 or outputs a sound congratulating the big hit from the speakers 8L and 8R as a fanfare effect. Set the process data for. Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image prompting right-handed striking on the image display device 5 and outputs a sound prompting right-handed striking from the speakers 8L and 8R as a right-handed striking promotion effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when the big hit round starts at t4 after that, the CPU 103 normally opens the big winning opening, and at the same time, the production control CPU 120 is given a command to specify that the big winning opening is open (A101 command). To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the first round.

After that, when the 1st round is completed at t5, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A201 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the second R starts at t6, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A102 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the second round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V probability change suggestion effect (see FIGS. 11-41) based on the command (A102 command) during which the large winning opening is open.

After that, when the second R is completed at t7, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A202 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 3Rs start at t8, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A103 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 3rd round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the V notice effect (see FIGS. 11-42) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open.

After that, when the 3rd round is completed at t9, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the inter-round effect between the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 sets process data for executing the effect (see FIGS. 11-43) aiming at V based on the designated command (A203 command) after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 11-21, after that, when the 4th round starts at t10, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening, and at the same time, the effect control CPU 120 is given a command (A104 command) to open the large winning opening. To send. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round in the 4th round. For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a V notice effect (see FIG. 11-42) based on a command (A104 command) during which the winning opening is open, and then aims at V (see FIG. 11-43). Set the process data to execute.

After that, when the V prize is generated at t11, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the V winning effect (see FIGS. 11-44).

After that, when the 4th round is completed at t12, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A204 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, when the 5th R starts at t13, the CPU 103 normally opens the large winning opening and transmits a command (A105 command) during opening of the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the effect during the round at the 5th round.

After that, when the 5th R is completed at t14, the CPU 103 normally closes the large winning opening and transmits a designated command (A205 command) after opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

After that, at t15, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process data for executing the ending effect.

After that, it is controlled to a probabilistic change state and a time saving state (high probability high base state), and in this state, the CPU 103 changes the effect control command according to whether or not the number of reserved storages exceeds 0.

For example, at t16, when the number of reserved storages exceeds 0, the CPU 103 specifies the number of reserved storages (C2 series command), the background designation command (95 series command), and the symbol variation designation for the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 fluctuates and displays the decorative symbol in response to the fluctuation of the second special symbol, and the effect during fluctuation according to the fluctuation of the second special symbol (for example, reach effect, notice effect, etc.). ) Is set to execute.

On the other hand, when the number of reserved storages does not exceed 0, the CPU 103 transmits a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F series command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 performs a customer waiting demonstration effect (see FIG. 11-60) that can identify that the game is not being performed. For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays an image having an initial value (for example, 123) as a decorative symbol or a small symbol on the image display device 5, or stops the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It should be noted that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 11-60, and the game is such that the game is not performed, such as a character image or a logo of the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Any production may be used as long as the person can be identified.

[Lamp lighting mode]
FIG. 11-22 is an explanatory diagram showing a lighting mode of the lamp. In this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L). , The right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all turned off, as shown in FIG. 11-22 (A). It is represented by.

Further, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 are all lit as shown in FIG. 11-22 (B). It is expressed in the aspect of.

Further, in this embodiment, the game effect lamp 9 (movable body lamp 9d, attacker lamp 9c, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, lower left lamp 075F009D, board right lamp 075F009F, board left lamp 075F009E, frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 each light / blink / blink in a manner corresponding to the effect and the background displayed on the image display device 5. The state in which the light is turned off is represented by a hatching mode as shown in FIG. 11-22 (C).

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game will be described. 11-23 to 11-33 and 11-38 to 11-50 are explanatory views showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 during the game.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (a), when the lost symbol is stopped due to the change of the special symbol of the previous game, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the stop of the lost symbol. After that, when there is a first hold storage number, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) to the effect control CPU 120. ), Display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes and displays the decorative symbol in response to the change in the first special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the first special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-23 (b1) to 11-24 (b3) as a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a background designation command (95 series command). Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-23 (b1) and 11-24 (b3) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-23 (b1), the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fluctuation of the first special symbol. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (b2), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Then, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect.

After that, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (b3), when a big hit occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting. Send commands (FD commands). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and lights the lighting means such as the LED in the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-24 (c1) to 11-38 (d2) as a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command). Set based on. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-24 (c1) and 11-38 (d2) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

Here, the fanfare production will be described in detail. The fanfare production is divided into multiple production parts. In this embodiment, the fanfare production includes a blessing part, a name display part, and a right-handed promotion part. The blessing part is a production part in which a production for congratulating the big hit is executed, and as will be described later in FIG. 11-24 (c1), an image for congratulating the big hit is displayed on the image display device 5. The display, the sound for congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. The name display part is a production part that notifies the player that the jackpot round will start by notifying the name of the generated jackpot gaming state and also informs the player of the type of the jackpot gaming state that has occurred. As will be described later in -24 (c2) and (c3), a name image indicating the name of the jackpot gaming state may be displayed on the image display device 5, or a sound corresponding to the start of the jackpot may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. , The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The right-handed promotion part is an effect part that encourages the player to hit right-handed, and as will be described later in FIGS. 11-24 (c4) to 11-33 (c29), the image display of characters and figures is used. A large right-handed promotion effect that encourages the player to hit right is executed. The effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) from the CPU 103 after the jackpot symbol is stopped and the symbol is confirmed, and then receives the jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) from the CPU 103. , Start the fanfare production, and execute the fanfare until the normal big prize opening opens and the big hit round starts.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1), as a blessing part in the fanfare production, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed as an image. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so that the sound displayed on the device 5 or congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, or the lighting mode congratulates the big hit. Or something. Further, as a right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion in which an image consisting of a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character of "right-handed") is displayed in a small size on the upper right of the image display device 5. The production is executed. The image display device 5 has a plurality of layers, and a predetermined image can be displayed on each layer. As shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1), the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect is an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, "Congratulations!" Along with the character image. It is displayed on the layer on the front side (the direction of the player when viewed from the pachinko game machine 1 side) rather than the character image). Further, in the fanfare effect, a sound prompting right-handed hitting is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and further, as a right-handed hitting promotion effect, the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 promotes right-handed hitting. (Lights up in this example). The starting order of the above-mentioned image display and lighting is as follows. First, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start designation command (A0 system command) and a right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), and lights the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 lights the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display lighting command (FD system command), while the small right-handed display promotion effect is based on the received jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). The image display device 5 displays an image composed of the figures and characters in the above, and an image congratulating the big hit. At this time, the image composed of the figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect located on the front side is displayed on the image display device 5 at an earlier timing than the image congratulating the big hit. That is, first, the lamps are turned on in the order of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055, and then the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect, and the image congratulating the big hit. The image is displayed. In addition, the display of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 are determined by the final fluctuation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. Will be done. At that time, first, after the symbol is confirmed, the CPU 103 transmits a right-handed display / off designation command together with a background designation command, and turns off the right-handed display unit 075F030. The effect control CPU 120 turns off the right-handed display unit 075F055 based on the received right-handed display extinguishing command, while displaying an image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect based on the received background specification command. Upon completion, the image display device 5 displays the background image in the normal state. The image composed of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may start at the same timing and end at the same timing. In this way, the display period of the image consisting of figures and characters in the small right-handed promotion effect coincides with the lighting period by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055. Becomes easier to understand.

As shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2), as a name display part in the fanfare production, a part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example, among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!" "CHANGE") is displayed in the center of the image display device 5, the sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the game effect lamp 9 is set to the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. The lighting mode changes.

As shown in FIG. 11-25 (c3), as the name display part in the fanfare production, following FIG. 11-24 (c2), the remaining part of the name image showing the name of the generated jackpot game state (in this example). Among the character images of "CHANGE BONUS !!", "BONUS !!") is newly added and displayed in the center of the image display device 5. As a result, a character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 as a name image indicating the name of the generated jackpot game state. In addition, the game effect lamp 9 is temporarily turned off in preparation for the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect starting from the next timing. After that, from FIG. 11-24 (c4) to FIG. 11-33 (c29), as a right-handed promotion effect, a figure (in this example, an arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (in this example, the character "right-handed"). ) Is displayed in the center of the image display device 5 in a large size.

Here, the effect control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 in the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data tables shown in FIGS. 11-34 to 11-37. These lighting data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs guidance light emission that urges the player to hit the right side by moving the light emitting portion of the frame lamp based on the lighting data stored in the lighting data table. In this embodiment, the light emitting portion literally refers to a portion that emits light, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lit lamp is located is referred to as a light emitting portion, and other lamps. The place where the non-lit lamp (that is, the lamp that is off) is located is not called the light emitting part. In another example, the light emitting portion refers to a portion that emits light with high brightness, and for example, among a plurality of lamps included in the frame lamp, the portion where the lamp that is lit with high brightness is located emits light. The place where the lamp lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the light emitting place is located may not be called the light emitting place. Hereinafter, lighting control (light emission control) of various lamps by the effect control CPU 120 will be specifically described.

11-34 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a parent table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIGS. 11-34, in the parent table in the lighting data table, the frame lamp (frame right lamp 075F009R, frame left lamp 075F009L), movable body lamp 9d, lower left lamp 075F009D, attacker upper lamp 075F009U, board left lamp 075F009E, For each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the board right lamp 075F009F and the attacker lamp 9c, the production time of each of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is specified. For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 executes a fanfare effect for 9880 msec and then a large right-handed promotion effect for 2000 msec. Since the large right-handed promotion effect is configured to be repeated a plurality of times (twice in this embodiment), the game effect lamp 9 decides to repeat the large right-handed promotion effect of 2000 msec twice. Become.

FIG. 11-35 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a child table in the lighting data table. As shown in FIGS. 11-35, in the child table in the lighting data table, for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, each time of the fanfare effect and the large right-handed promotion effect is subdivided and referred to in each time zone. The grandchild table is specified.

Here, the grandchild table W11 common to the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L is designated for the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, since the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U of the attacker, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are turned off without being used in the large right-handed promotion effect, no grandchild table is provided. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible. For the attacker lamp 9c, a plurality of grandchild tables are specified by further subdividing 2000 msec, which is the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect, into a plurality of periods. For example, the grandchild table A11a is specified for 330 msec, the grandchild table A11b is specified for 1350 msec, and the grandchild table A11c is specified for 320 msec.

11-36 and 11-37 are explanatory views showing an example of a grandchild table in the lighting data table. FIG. 11-36 shows the data in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. As shown in FIGS. 11-36, in the grandchild table W11 for the frame right lamp, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all lamps are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). The data of turning off (0x000000) is specified in. In the grandchild table, the data of the first to eleventh lamps as shown in FIG. 11-2 are specified for each of the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L. Further, in FIGS. 11-36, for each lamp included in the frame lamp, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, the data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and the data (000) at the timing of ending lighting are used. On the other hand, a broken line circle is attached.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table W11, first the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T1, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T2, and then the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T3. The second lamp lights up, then the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L lights up at T4, then the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T5, and then the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T6. The lamp lights up, then the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T7, then the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T8, and then the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R lights up at T9. Then, at T10, the 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit, and then at T11, the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is lit. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the 4th lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T46, then the 3rd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T47, and then the 2nd lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L was turned off at T48. Next, at T49, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off, then at T50, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T51, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then At T52, the 4th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T53, the 5th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, then at T54, the 6th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then at T55. The 7th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the 8th lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off at T56. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses. It should be noted that the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect after all the lamps are turned off at T56 is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time (1000 msec). It is T57). The first, fifth to eleventh lamps of the frame left lamp 075F009L, and the first, ninth to eleventh lamps of the frame right lamp 075F009R are turned off at all times.

If the grandchild table W11 in which the above-mentioned data is stored is used, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), it starts from the lighting of the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L. , Frame right lamp Up to the 8th lamp of 075F009R, the frame lamp lights in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side. The large right-handed promotion effect by such a frame lamp is performed twice.

FIG. 11-37 shows the data in the grandchild tables K11 for the movable lamp 9d and the grandchild tables A11a to A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIG. 11-37, in the grandchild table K11 for the movable lamp 9d, RGB data is defined over T1 to T56 at intervals of 30 msec, and all of them are specified at the final time of 1000 msec (T57). Data for turning off the lamp (0x000000) is specified. In the grandchild table K11, regarding the movable body lamp 9d, among the characters "XXX" attached to the movable body 32, the left X (left X), the middle X (middle X), and the right X (right X). Data are specified for each of the above. Further, in FIGS. 11-37, for each lamp included in the movable lamp 9d, in order to show the lighting period in an easy-to-understand manner, data (F00) at the timing of starting lighting and data (000) at the timing of ending lighting ) Is marked with a broken line.

Looking at the data in the grandchild table K11, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d lights up at T3, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d lights up at T4, and then the movable body lamp at T5. The right X lamp of 9d lights up. After starting lighting, each lamp continues to light while changing colors so as to have seven colors. After that, first the left X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T48, then the middle X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T49, and then the right X lamp of the movable body lamp 9d is turned off at T50. Turns off. After that, each lamp is turned off until 2000 msec in one large right-handed promotion effect elapses. It should be noted that after all the lamps are turned off at T50 and then kept off until T56, the remaining time until 2000 msec elapses in one large right-handed promotion effect is about 320 msec. That is, since the time used for lighting etc. is 30 msec × 56 = 1680 msec, only about 320 msec remains, but in order to surely turn off the remaining time, the final turn-off time is 1000 msec, which is longer than the remaining time. It is (T57). Further, as compared with the grandchild table W11 of the frame lamp, the movable body lamp 9d starts to turn on later than the frame lamp (that is, the first T1 and T2 remain off), and turns off earlier than the frame lamp.

Using the grandchild table K11 in which the above-mentioned data is stored, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), the fourth lamp and the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L can be used. While it is lit, the movable body lamp 9d is turned off, then the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is turned on at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned on, and then the middle X and right X lamps are turned on. After that, each lamp continues to light in seven colors, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d goes out at the same timing when the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out, and then the middle X and right X lamps go out. Turns off. As a result, the movable lamp 9d is lit in seven colors so as to draw an arch from the left side to the right side, starting from the lighting of the left X to the lamp of the middle X and the lamp of the right X. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the movable lamp 9d is performed twice.

Further, FIG. 11-37 shows the data in the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c for the attacker lamp 9c. As shown in FIGS. 11-37, in the grandchild table A11a of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 330 msec to be turned on, and the data is turned off. The data of (0x0000000) is specified.

In the grandchild table A11b of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is defined at intervals of 20 msec with respect to 1350 msec to be lit. However, since the attacker lamp 9c only repeats the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) over 1350 msec, the grandchild table A11b defines only one pattern color change for 280 nsec. ing. That is, the effect control CPU 120 lights the attacker lamp 9c for 280 nsec each time the grandchild table A11b is referred to once at 1350 msec, and then repeatedly refers to the grandchild table A11b until the end of 1350 msec to determine a predetermined value. The color change of the pattern (for example, seven colors) is repeated.

In the grandchild table A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, RGB data is specified for a very long time of 600,000 msec with respect to 320 msec to be turned on, and the data of extinguishing (0x0000000) is specified as the data. There is.

When the large right-handed promotion effect is started, the effect control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp 9c by referring to the grandchild table A11a for the first 330 msec, and then turns off the grandchild table A11b at intervals of 280 nsec for 1350 msec. The attacker lamp 9c is made to repeat the color change of a predetermined pattern (for example, seven colors) by referring to it a plurality of times, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned off by referring to the grandchild table A11c over the last 320 msec. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), the frame lamp lights up in an arch from the left side to the right side, and eventually the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R turns on. After reaching the vicinity of the attacker, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on, then the frame lamp is turned off in an arch from the left side to the right side, and then the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off, and then the attacker lamp 9c is turned on. Will turn off. Such a large right-handed promotion effect by the attacker lamp 9c is performed twice.

Further, in the case of a lighting pattern such as the grandchild tables A11a, A11b, and A11c of the attacker lamp 9c, in which the color is turned off at the beginning, the color of a predetermined pattern is repeated in the middle, and then the color is turned off, the attacker lamp 9c is turned on 3 It is not necessary to prepare data for all the time from the beginning to the end for lighting of 2000 msec by repeatedly referring to the same grandchild table A11b for the repetition of the color of the predetermined pattern in the middle while dividing it into scenarios. , It is sufficient to prepare the data of only the repeating part. Therefore, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

Returning to FIG. 11-25 (c4), an effect mode in the large right-handed promotion effect executed in the right-handed promotion part in the fanfare effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-25 (c4), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-25 (c5), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-26 (c6), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed on the image display device 5. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the movable body lamp 9d, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-26 (c7), in the image display device 5, the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIGS. 11-26 (c8), the tip of the arrow image directed to the right is further displayed in the image display device 5. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c9), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c10), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-27 (c11), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the board right lamp 075F009F, the board right lamp 075F009F starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c12), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c13), the image display device 5 further displays an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (c14), the image display device 5 continues to display an arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R starts lighting. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-29 (c15), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" is displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Further, since the frame lamp has reached the vicinity of the attacker lamp 9c, the attacker lamp 9c starts lighting. After that, the attacker lamp 9c repeatedly turns on and off (that is, blinks). Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-29 (c16), in the image display device 5, the character image of "right" continues to be displayed on the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L goes out. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-29 (c17), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the left X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c18), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the first lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L is turned off. Further, the inside X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c19), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the second lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right X of the movable body lamp 9d is also turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (c20), in the image display device 5, a "right-handed" character image is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the third lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c21), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fourth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c22), in the image display device 5, a character image of "right-handed" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the fifth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-31 (c23), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the sixth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the right lamp 075F009F is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c24), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the seventh lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect in accordance with the lighting of the game effect lamp 9.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25), in the image display device 5, the character image of "Right-handed !!" is displayed on top of the arrow image directed to the right. Regarding the game effect lamp 9, the eighth lamp of the frame right lamp 075F009R is turned off. Further, the blinking attacker lamp 9c is also turned off. Sound output also stops from the speakers 8L and 8R. As a result, a series of first large right-handed promotion effects is completed.

As shown in FIG. 11-32 (c26), the second large right-handed promotion effect starts. At this time, regarding the game effect lamp 9, only the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L starts lighting. In the second large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect. As a result, when the game shifts to the big hit round after the big right-handed promotion effect is completed, the BGM (sound according to the background of the big hit round) in the big hit round and the sound in the big right-handed promotion effect do not overlap. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 11-33 (c27) to (c29), in the second large right-handed promotion effect, the game effect lamp 9 lights / blinks / turns off in the same manner as the first large right-handed promotion effect. However, during that time, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect.

In this way, the large right-handed promotion effect uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion effect, and is an effect that encourages the player to right-handed in a manner that emphasizes it more than the small right-handed promotion effect. is there. Therefore, by executing the large right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare effect, it is possible to encourage the player to right-handed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound (for example, a cure sound effect) in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect, which is effective for the player. While it is possible to encourage right-handed strikes, in the second large right-handed strike promotion effect, the speakers 8L and 8R do not output sound in a manner corresponding to the right-handed strike promotion effect, so that the BGM during the jackpot round that starts after that Can be prevented from interfering with.

In addition, in the large right-handed promotion effect, the arrow image and the character image are displayed so as to appear gradually in stages, and moreover, the right-handed hitting is effectively promoted by lighting or blinking the lamp by the game effect lamp 9. Yes, the effect is more flashy than the effect of displaying the name image of the jackpot game state shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2). For example, the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect appears one character at a time, but all the character images appear at once in the character image in the name image in the big hit game state. In addition, the size of the character image in the big right-handed promotion effect is larger than that of all the character images in the name image in the big hit game state. Further, the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect is longer than the execution time of the effect of displaying the name image. As a result, after the name image of the big hit game state is displayed and the player is notified that the big hit has been achieved, the player can be notified by further emphasizing the right-handed hit by the big right-handed promotion effect.

Since the attacker lamp 9c is a place where the player actually carries the game ball and aims at the time of launching the game ball, the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a flashy color such as seven colors that the player can easily recognize and blinks. It is possible to draw more attention to the player's target. The attacker lamp 9c may always be lit in a predetermined color such as seven colors without blinking.

In the following example, the production mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when a 5R probability variation jackpot occurs will be described. The number of rounds is different for the 10R probability variation jackpot, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot. Further, the 5 normal jackpot is different in that the V notice effect and the V winning effect are not executed, but other production modes are the same as the 5R probability variation jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-38 (c26), when the game effect lamp 9 is turned off and the second big right-handed promotion effect is completed, the switch to the big hit round is switched as shown in FIG. 11-38 (c27). Start. Specifically, the visibility is gradually reduced by fading out the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!". The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-out. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (c28), the entire screen of the image display device 5 becomes pure white. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-out. As described above, based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command), a series of effect data up to the stage shown in FIG. 11-38 (c28) is set.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d3) to 11-40 (e4) based on the command (A101 command) during the opening of the large winning opening. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-39 (d3) and 11-40 (e4) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d3), the background image during the jackpot round appears by fading in from the state where the entire screen of the image display device 5 is completely white. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the fade-in. The image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is maintained without being affected by the fade-in.

Here, "fade-in" and "fade-out" will be specifically described. Fade-in and fade-out are a type of effect in the image display called "transition". "Transition" is a switch that is inserted between the first cut and the second cut when the scene of the video is switched from the first cut (image) to the second cut (image) when editing the video. It is an effect. In addition to fade-in and fade-out, transitions include various techniques in video editing, such as wipes and overlaps.

"Fade-in" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually appears on the screen. As a specific method, in fade-in, the transparency (transmittance) of an object (image) is changed from the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) to the second degree (for example, 0) which is lower than the first degree. % Or 1%) over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually reduced from 100% (first degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually lowered from 50% to 0% (second degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 100% (first degree) to 0% (second degree) at once to change the object (image) opaquely, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-ins. When the opacity (which can be said to be opaque) is changed instead of the transparency (transmittance), the above-mentioned% value is reversed. That is, in the fade-in, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%) higher than the second degree. ) Will be changed over a predetermined period of time.

"Fade out" is an effect in which an image showing some object (background, character, etc.) gradually disappears from the screen. As a specific method, in the fade-out, the transparency (transmittance) of the object (image) is changed from the second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99) higher than the first degree. %) Is changed over a predetermined period of time. For example, if the predetermined time is 2 seconds, the transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 0% (second degree) to 50% using 1 second between 0 and 1 second. The transparency (transmittance) is gradually increased from 50% to 100% (first degree) using 1 second between 1 and 2 seconds thereafter. On the other hand, like the method of switching the transparency (transmittance) from 0% (second degree) to 100% (first degree) at once to change the object (image) transparently, the transparency (transparency) takes a predetermined time. Those that do not gradually change the rate) are not fade-outs. When changing the opacity (opacity) instead of the transparency (transmittance), in the fade-out, the opacity (opacity) of the object (image) is set to the first degree (for example, 100% or 99%). ) To a second degree (for example, 0% or 1%) lower than the first degree, over a predetermined time.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (c26) and (d1), the transparency (transparency) of the first layer of the screen showing the arrow image and the character image of "Right-handed !!" By gradually increasing the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen to 100% in the state where the rate) is 0%, the arrow image and the characters "Right-handed !!" The image is gradually made transparent to make it difficult to see (fade out). As a result, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (d2), only the white image in the second layer of the screen located behind the first layer of the screen is shown to the player. After that, as shown in FIG. 11-38 (d3), when the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is 100%, the transparency (transmittance) of the first layer of the screen is set to 0%. By gradually lowering it to, the background image during the jackpot round is gradually made opaque to make it easier to see (fade in). As a result, the player is shown the background image during the jackpot round in the first layer located in front of the second layer of the screen.

As a transition, there is also a method called "crossfade". Crossfade is, for example, by fading out the first layer of the screen showing some object, while fading in the second layer of the screen showing some object located behind the first layer. As an appearance, it is a method of showing the second layer of the screen after showing the first layer of the screen. On the other hand, in the case of this embodiment, as described above, by fading out the first layer of the screen and then fading in, the white image always displayed in the second layer of the screen located on the back side. Is shown once during the switching from the image in the first ED period to the image in the second ED period, so that it is different from the method such as crossfade.

In this embodiment, even if the switching display of the background image such as the transition as described above is executed, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the screen is affected by the switching display of the background image. The display is maintained without receiving. Here, "affected by the switching display of the background image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed promotion effect due to the switching display of the background image such as fade-in or fade-out, or the player The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the image of the small right-handed promotion effect can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the background image. It can be said that it is not affected by the switching display.

As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), after the background image during the jackpot round appears due to fade-in, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (e1), when 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens normally. , A background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. At the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, a point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed. Furthermore, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R start to output BGM (sound according to the background of the big hit round) in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. As described above, at the time when this BGM is output, the output of the sound corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect has already been completed.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e2), during 1R, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right. Arrows and letters) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e3), when the first round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A201 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. To do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 11-40 (e4), the large winning opening is normally kept closed during the round, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, it continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A102 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 2nd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-41 (e5) to 11-42 (e8) based on the command (A102 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-41 (e5) and 11-42 (e8) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5), when the 2nd round starts, the large winning opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e6), the V probability variation suggestion effect is executed during 2R. Specifically, the character image of "PUSH !!" is displayed together with the image prompting the operation of the push button 31B so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability variation suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 11-41 (e7), when the player operates the push button 31B in the V probability variation suggestion effect, the V is placed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. A character image of "Success !!" is displayed as an effect to notify that it is a probabilistic jackpot. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability change suggestion effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V probability variation suggestion effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e8), when the second round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A202 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. To do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e9), during the round, the large winning opening is normally kept closed, and the center of the screen of the image display device 5 is overlapped with the background image corresponding to the effect during the round. The text image of "Success !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A103 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 3rd round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-42 (e10) to 11-43 (e12) based on the command (A103 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-42 (e10) and 11-43 (e12) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10), when the 3rd round starts, the normal large winning opening is opened and the V notice effect is executed. Specifically, the character image of "grab V in the next round !!" is displayed together with the character image so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIGS. 11-43 (e11), during the 3Rs, the V notice effect is continuously executed, and the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is overlapped with the character image in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The text image of "Grab V in the next round !!" is displayed, and the image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V notice effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e12), when the 3Rs are completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A203 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. To do. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect aiming at V during the rounds from the 3rd round to the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 103.

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13), during the rounds, the effect is executed aiming at V while the large winning opening is closed, that is, the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening. Specifically, the V variable winning ball device 075F007B (V large) is a target (place) aimed at the player by right-handed so as to overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. An arrow image pointing to the winning opening) and a character image of "Aim" are displayed. In this way, according to the production aiming at V, it is possible to urge the player to right-handed to let the game ball enter the V large winning opening by using the image display related to the V large winning opening. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A104 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 4th round based on the command from the CPU 104. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e14) and (e15) based on the command (A104 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-44 (e14) and 11-44 (e15) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14), when the 4th round starts, the V grand prize opening is opened, and the production is continuously aimed at V. As a result, the player will aim for the V-large winning opening by hitting right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15), during 4R, the effect of aiming at V is executed, and the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (such as aiming at V).

When the game ball enters the V large winning opening and the V winning occurs, the CPU 103 transmits a probability change determination device passage designation command (AD00 command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the V winning effect. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e16) to 11-45 (e18) based on the probability variation determination device pass designation command (AD00 command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-44 (e16) and 11-45 (e18) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16), when the V prize effect is executed, the V prize is generated by overlapping the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. The image of "V" is displayed, and the image (arrows and letters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.). Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round (V winning effect, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e17), when the 4th round is completed, the V large winning opening is closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A204 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. To do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening.

As shown in FIGS. 11-45 (e18), the V large winning opening and the normal large winning opening remain closed during the round, and overlap the background image corresponding to the effect during the round in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. In this way, the character image of "V" is displayed, and further, the image (arrow and character) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right.

When the rounds are completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A105 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect during the round in the 5th round based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-45 (e19) to 11-46 (e21) based on the command (A105 command) during which the large winning opening is open. In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-45 (e19) and 11-46 (e21) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-45 (e19), when the 5th round starts, the normal grand prize opening is usually opened, a background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner is continued. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (e20), during 5R, the effect during the round is executed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, in the upper right of the screen, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be in the upper right. (Arrows and letters) are displayed. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (e21), when the 5th round is completed, the large winning opening is normally closed, and the CPU 103 transmits a designated command (A205 command) to the effect control CPU 120 after opening the large winning opening. To do. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the designated command after opening the large winning opening. Further, at a predetermined timing thereafter, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot end designation command (A3 system command) to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the ending effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the data of each effect of FIGS. 11-46 (f1) to 11-47 (f4) based on the jackpot end designation command (A3 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-46 (f1) and 11-47 (f4) proceeds over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-46 (f1), when the ending effect is started, an image for selecting the stage in the probability change state after the big hit game state is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f2), during the ending effect, a name image (in this example, a character image of “Dream RUSH !!”) indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the character image. It is displayed in the center. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f3), the immersive suppression notification effect is executed during the ending effect. Specifically, an image for preventing the player from being absorbed in the game, such as "Be careful about being absorbed in the game. Pachinko is a play that you can enjoy moderately." Is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. At the time of consecutive hits, a game result image showing the result of the game in the big hit game state (for example, the number of prize balls) is displayed at the bottom of the screen during the ending effect, but at the time of the first hit. Also, such a game result image may be displayed during the ending effect.

As shown in FIG. 11-47 (f4), an image for preventing forgetting to take a card owned by a player related to a game, such as a prepaid card or a membership card, is displayed in the center of the image display device 5. Further, in the upper right corner of the screen, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the ending effect. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the ending effect.

When there is a second hold storage number after the ending effect is completed, the CPU 103 specifies the hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), the background designation command (95 series command), and the symbol variation designation for the effect control CPU 120. A command (8D system command), a display result specification command (8C system command), and a variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol in response to the change in the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the second special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect of FIGS. 11-48 (g1) and (g2) as a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command. Set based on (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-48 (g1) and (g2) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g1), even during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g2), the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped and the lost symbol is displayed. Also at this time, in the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the loss symbol stop.

When there is a second hold storage number after the fluctuation of the second special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 sends a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command) and a background designation command (95 series command) to the effect control CPU 120. , The symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 system command) are transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 changes the decorative symbol in response to the change in the second special symbol based on the command from the CPU 103, or changes the effect in accordance with the change in the second special symbol (for example,). , Reach production, notice production, etc.). The effect control CPU 120 uses the data of each effect shown in FIGS. 11-48 (g3) to 11-49 (g5) as a hold storage number designation command (C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and so on. Set based on the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), display result specification command (8C system command), and variation pattern specification command (81 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-48 (g3) and 11-49 (g5) progresses over time rather than being triggered by an effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-48 (g3), even during the fluctuation of the second special symbol, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol. Sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g4), in the case of a jackpot fluctuation, an image corresponding to the reach effect is displayed on the image display device 5, and a sound corresponding to the reach effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), a group notice effect is executed as a notice effect during the jackpot fluctuation. The group notice effect is a specific symbol that disappears after the reach symbol becomes difficult to see due to the appearance of objects such as characters in stages or at once on the screen of the image display device 5. It is a production that makes a match (for example, 777) appear. Even if the advance notice effect that makes it difficult to see the design is executed in such a reach mode, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner of the screen without being affected by the display of the effect image. Arrows and letters) are displayed. Here, "affected by the display of the production image" means that the player cannot completely see the image of the small right-handed striking effect or the player promotes the small right-handed striking due to the display of the effect image such as the group notice. The player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is hindered or reduced, such as the image of the effect can be seen a little but the meaning (right-handed promotion) indicated by the image cannot be understood. It means that the visibility of the player is affected in some way. On the contrary, in the situation where the player's visibility to the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is not hindered or deteriorated without the above-mentioned phenomenon occurring, the image of the small right-handed promotion effect is the effect image. It can be said that it is not affected by the display.

When the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the CPU 103 transmits a symbol confirmation designation command (8F00) to the effect control CPU 120. The effect control CPU 120 does not particularly set the effect based on the symbol confirmation designation command.

As shown in FIG. 11-49 (g6), when a big hit (10R probability variation big hit) occurs as a result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol, the CPU 103 gives the effect control CPU 120 a big hit start designation command (A0 system command). To send. Since the right-handed promotion effect has already been executed, the right-handed display lighting command (FD command) is not transmitted. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fanfare effect based on the command from the CPU 103. The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect data of FIGS. 11-50 (h1) and (h2) based on the jackpot start designation command (A0 system command). In other words, each effect performed between FIGS. 11-50 (h1) and (h2) proceeds with the passage of time, not triggered by the effect control command.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (h1), as a fanfare effect, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Yattane !!") is displayed on the image display device 5. Alternatively, a sound congratulating the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be a lighting mode for congratulating the big hit. In the upper right corner of the screen, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed in the upper right corner.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), a name image (character image of "SPECIAL BONUS !!" in this example) showing the name of the jackpot game state that occurred after the fanfare effect was started is the image display device 5. The sound corresponding to the start of the big hit is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 is changed so as to be the lighting mode corresponding to the start of the big hit. In addition, in the case of consecutive chan hits per special figure 2, since the large right-handed promotion effect has already been executed when the special figure 1 is hit, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed again. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24), no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and further. , The frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

When the fanfare effect is completed, the CPU 103 transmits a command (A101 command) for opening the large winning opening to the effect control CPU 120. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 120 switches from the fanfare effect to the in-round effect based on the command from the CPU 103, and executes the in-round effect in the first round.

As shown in FIG. 11-50 (i1), when the jackpot 1R starts, the normal jackpot opens, the background image corresponding to the effect during the round is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and further, the upper right corner continues. An image (arrows and letters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on. The game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the effect during the round.

After that, although not shown, various effects such as V notice effect, V aiming effect, and V winning effect are executed during the round as shown in FIGS. 11-40 to 11-46, and when the big hit round ends. , The ending effect is executed as shown in FIGS. 11-46 and 11-47. Then, as shown in FIGS. 11-48, the probability change state after the big hit game state is controlled again. In this series of games, an image (arrows and characters) of a small right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020, and a fourth symbol. Each of the right-handed display units 075F055 of the unit 075F050 keeps lighting. Eventually, when the probability change state after the big hit game state ends and the normal state is controlled without the big hit occurring, the CPU 103 sends a right-handed display / off designation command to the effect control CPU 120 for the effect control. The CPU 120 erases the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect on the upper right of the screen of the image display device 5, and also displays the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display of the fourth symbol unit 075F050. Turn off each of the parts 075F055. As a result, the player will hit the left again in the normal state.

[Direction mode of pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from power failure]
FIG. 11-51 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from the power failure during the fanfare effect according to the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-20, the power failure shown in FIG. 11-51 assumes a power failure 1 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the fanfare production and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIGS. 11-51, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!") is displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 11). The state of -24 (c1)) and the name image indicating the name of the jackpot game state (character image of "CHANGE BONUS !!" in this example) are displayed on the image display device 5 (FIG. 11-24 (c2)). (State), only the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 11-28 (c14)), and the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect is "right-handed! If a power failure occurs in any of the states in which the character image of "!" Is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-31 (c23)), the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5. After that, when the power is turned on, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A101 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A101 command), the effect image in 1R as shown in FIG. 11-39 (e1) is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, an image congratulating the big hit (in this example, a character image and a character image of "Congratulations !!"), and a name image showing the name of the big hit game state (in this example, "CHANGE BONUS !!" (Character image), the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect, and the character image of "Right-handed !!" added to the arrow image in the large right-handed promotion effect are canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs before the large right-handed promotion effect is executed or before the large right-handed promotion effect is completed, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on thereafter. Therefore, at the very least, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right immediately after recovering from the power failure, and he forgets to hit right and cannot usually let the game ball enter the grand prize opening. It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged as much as possible.

FIG. 11-52 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-20, the power interruption shown in FIGS. 11-52 assumes a power interruption 2 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 1R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 11-52, when a power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the effect in 1R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-40 (e2)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. If a prize ball is obtained during the subsequent round, points may be added again starting from 0 pt, for example, 10 pt is added for every 10 pieces obtained. The point image is not limited to the one displayed at 0 pt after returning from the power failure, and the point may not be known by the predetermined image such as "??".

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 11-53 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after one round of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 11-53 causes the power supply 3 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 1R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 11-53, when a power failure occurs while an image corresponding to the effect between rounds is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-40 (e4)), the image display device 5 After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A102 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A102 command), the effect image in 2R as shown in FIG. 11-41 (e5) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. it can.

FIG. 11-54 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when recovering from the power failure during two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-20, the power interruption shown in FIGS. 11-54 assumes a power interruption 4 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 2R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 11-54, when an electric power failure occurs in the state where the image corresponding to the V probability variation suggestion effect in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5 (the state of FIG. 11-41 (e7)), the image is displayed. After the image is no longer displayed on the display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured in.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done.

FIG. 11-55 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after two rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-20, the power interruption shown in FIG. 11-55 is a power interruption 5 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 2R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 11-55, when a power failure occurs while the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 2R (the state of FIG. 11-42 (e9)), the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A103 command), the effect image in 2R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control The CPU 120 is to execute the V notice effect as shown in FIG. 11-42 (e10) based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 system command) received from the CPU 103. It can also be configured in.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. it can.

FIG. 11-56 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine when recovering from the power failure during the round after 3 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 11-56 causes the power supply 6 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after the 3Rs and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 11-56, when a power failure occurs in a state where the corresponding image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-43 (e13)) during the round after 3R, the image display device. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) is received from the CPU 103, and when the large winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) is received, the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A104 command), the effect image in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure. Further, since the stored data for the type of jackpot has been erased, the image corresponding to the effect aiming at V as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14) is canceled and not displayed after the power is turned on. If the CPU 103 is configured to send a jackpot start designation command (A0 series command) to the effect control CPU 120 in addition to the big winning opening opening designation command (A104 command) after recovering from the power failure, the effect control Based on the big winning opening opening designation command (A103 command) and the big hit start designation command (A0 series command) received from the CPU 103, the CPU 120 aims at V as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e14) and executes the effect. It can also be configured as follows.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the V grand prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. it can.

FIG. 11-57 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 recovers from the power failure during the four rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 11-57 assumes a power interruption 7 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 4R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 11-57, an image corresponding to the effect of aiming at V in 4R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state of FIG. 11-44 (e15)), or an image corresponding to the V winning effect. Is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 11-44 (e16)), and if a power failure occurs, the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, and then the power is turned on to "recovering ...". The character image of is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R as shown in FIG. 11-45 (e19) is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the big hit round, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power-off, the player is hit right-handed. It is possible to encourage the player to do so, and to prevent the player from being given a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. Can be done. Further, when a power failure occurs while aiming at V and performing a small right-handed promotion effect as in 4R, and as shown in FIG. 11-51 described above, it is small together with a large right-handed promotion effect. In the case where a power failure occurs while executing the right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is not executed while aiming at V or the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed after recovering from the power failure in common with each other. Is at least running. Therefore, in a common manner in any situation, it is possible to urge the player to hit right at least immediately after recovering from the power failure.

FIG. 11-58 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the case of recovering from the power failure during the round after 4 rounds of the big hit at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 11-58 causes the power supply 8 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the round after 4R and then the power supply is restored. Suppose.

As shown in FIGS. 11-58, when an electric power failure occurs in a state (state in FIG. 11-45 (e18)) in which an image corresponding to the V winning effect is displayed on the image display device 5 during the round after 4R. After the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of "Recovering ..." is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the large winning opening opening designation command (A105 command), the large winning opening opening designation command is received. Based on the command (A105 command), the effect image in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5. The point image corresponding to the number of prize balls obtained during the jackpot round is displayed at 0 pt because the memory of the points in the RAM 122 is erased by the electric power failure.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs between rounds, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to enter the game ball into the normal big prize opening in the next round by forgetting to hit right. it can.

FIG. 11-59 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from a power failure during the final round of the jackpot at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the power failure shown in FIG. 11-59 assumes a power failure 9 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during 5R and then the power supply is restored.

As shown in FIGS. 11-59, a state in which an image corresponding to the effect during the round in 5R is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 11-46 (e20)) or a state after the end of 5R (FIG. 11). When a power failure occurs in the state of −46 (e21)), after the image is no longer displayed on the image display device 5, the character image of “Recovering…” is displayed on the image display device 5 by turning on the power.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command) from the CPU 103, and when it receives the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command), it becomes the jackpot end designation command (A3 series command). Based on this, an effect image corresponding to the ending effect as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (f1) is displayed on the image display device 5.

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the final round of the big hit, the small right-handed promotion effect will be executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least immediately after returning from the power failure, the player will be notified. It is possible to encourage right-handed hits and prevent forgetting to hit right-handed as much as possible.

FIG. 11-60 is an explanatory diagram showing an effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when returning from a power failure during the ending effect at the time of hitting the special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the power interruption shown in FIG. 11-60 assumes a power interruption 10 when the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off during the ending effect and then the power supply is restored. ..

As shown in FIG. 11-60, among the ending effects, an image for selecting a stage in the probability change state after the big hit game state is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 11-46 (f1)), a character. A state in which a name image indicating the name of the probabilistic state is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the image (state in FIG. 11-47 (f2)), an image corresponding to the immersive suppression notification effect, and the result of the game in the jackpot game state are shown. A state in which the game result image is displayed on the image display device 5 (state in FIG. 11-47 (f3)), and an image for preventing forgetting to remove the card owned by the player are displayed on the image display device 5. If a power failure occurs in any of the displayed states (state of FIG. 11-47 (f4)), the image is not displayed on the image display device 5, and then the character image of "Recovering ..." is turned on by turning on the power. Is displayed on the image display device 5.

Here, even during the restoration, the image (arrows and characters) of the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5. Further, although not shown, when the power is turned on, the right-handed display unit 075F030 of the special figure LED board 075F020 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 of the fourth symbol unit 075F050 also prompt the right-handed display by lighting the lighting means.

After that, when there is a hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number designation command (C1 series command, C2 series command), a background designation command (95 series command), and a symbol variation designation command (8D series command) from the CPU 103. , Waits until the display result specification command (8C system command) and the fluctuation pattern specification command (81 system command) are received, and when these commands are received, the hold storage number specification command (C1 system command, C2 system command), Based on the background specification command (95 series command), the symbol variation specification command (8D system command), the display result specification command (8C system command), and the variation pattern specification command (81 series command), FIG. 11-48 (g1) shows. An effect image corresponding to such a fluctuation of a special symbol is displayed on the image display device 5.

On the other hand, when there is no hold storage number, the effect control CPU 120 waits until it receives a background designation command (95 series command) and a customer waiting demo designation command (9F00 command) from the CPU 103, and when these commands are received, the background Based on the designated command (95 series command) and the customer waiting demo designated command (9F00 command), the display on the image display device 5 is restored with the initial symbol ("123" as the decorative symbol and the small symbol in this example) stopped. ..

In this way, even if a power failure occurs during the ending, the small right-handed promotion effect is executed from the time the power is turned on after that, so at least the player is right-handed immediately after returning from the power failure. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a disadvantage such as not being able to win the second start winning opening in the probable change state after the big hit game state by forgetting to hit right. be able to.

[Main effects obtained by the feature section 075F]
The technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the feature unit 075F described above are individually listed below.

(1-1) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guide display includes a first guide display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and the first guide display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 11-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)).
After that, while the first guidance display is terminated, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (d1) and (d2), the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated. On the other hand, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the third guide display is performed and the second guide display is continued from the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area (for example, aim at V as shown in FIGS. 11-43 (e13)). The part that displays the image corresponding to the production and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued even after the game medium has changed from the state in which the game medium cannot enter the specific area to the state in which the game medium can enter the specific area (for example, FIG. As shown in 11-44 (e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, when the game medium enters the specific area, the third guide display is terminated while the second guide display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-44 (e16), V is aimed at and produced. The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (during the display) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, FIG. 11-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-2) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and the first guidance display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 11-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)).
After that, in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the first round, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 11-38 (d1), (d2). ), While ending the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),
After that, in conjunction with the closure of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area, the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 11-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, the second guide display and the third guide display are continued in conjunction with the opening of the attacker corresponding to the round before the round that enables entry into the specific area (for example, FIG. 11-44 (for example, FIG. 11-44). As shown in e15), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, in conjunction with the entry of the game medium into the specific area, the third guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-44 (e16), V The part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect while ending the image display corresponding to the effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (during the display) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, FIG. 11-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

(1-3) With a gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. There,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). (Processing to execute right-handed suggestion effect and V aiming effect by CPU120),
A specific area in which the game medium flowing down the second flow path can enter (for example, a detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B). With
The guidance display includes a first guidance display using an image display of characters and figures (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and the first guidance display. A second guide display using an image display smaller than the first guide display (for example, an image display corresponding to a small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)) and an image relating to the specific area. Including a third guidance display using the display (for example, an image display corresponding to the effect aiming at V shown in FIGS. 11-43 (e13)).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guide display and the second guide display are being executed during the execution of the start effect (for example, the fanfare effect) for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state. (For example, the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)).
After that, by receiving the 1R opening command (for example, the command for opening the large winning opening (A101 command)), the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIG. 11-38). (D1), (d2), the part where the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect is terminated while the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect is continued),
After that, by receiving a command after the 3Rs are completed (for example, a command designated after opening the large winning opening (A203 command)), the third guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued (for example, FIGS. 11-43). As shown in (e13), the part that aims at V and displays the image corresponding to the effect and continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
After that, by receiving the 4R opening command (for example, the command for opening the large winning opening (A104 command)), the second guidance display and the third guidance display are continued (for example, in FIG. 11-44 (e15)). As shown, the part that continues the image display corresponding to the production aiming at V and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion production),
After that, by receiving the V pass command (for example, the probability change determination device pass designation command (AD00 command)), the third guide display is terminated while the second guide display is continued (for example, FIGS. 11-44). As shown in (e16), aiming at V and ending the image display corresponding to the effect, while continuing the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect),
While the first guide display and the second guide display are being performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-31 (c23), an image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and an image corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect). It is shown in FIG. 11-44 (e15) when a power failure occurs during the display (during the display) and the power is restored from the power failure, and while the second guide display and the third guide display are performed (for example, FIG. 11-44 (e15)). In both cases where a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure while the image display corresponding to the effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed aiming at V as described above, the first The image display is performed again in a manner in which the guidance display and the third guidance display are not performed and the second guidance display is performed (for example, "Recovering ..." after the power is turned on as shown in FIGS. 11-51 and 11-57. " The part where the character image and the image of the small right-handed promotion effect are displayed).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. It is possible to make sure that the player is recognized, and then, while ending the large right-handed promotion effect, the small right-handed promotion effect is continued as it is so as not to appeal to the player that the player is excessively right-handed. In addition, the production of aiming for V to aim at the V big winning opening is executed from the time when the V big winning opening is still closed, and by continuing as it is even after the V big winning opening is opened, V It is possible to appeal to the player the importance of aiming at the big winning opening and to ensure that the game ball enters the V big winning opening. Further, after the V prize is generated and the V large prize opening is closed, the player can be prevented from giving unnecessary promotion notification by aiming at V and ending the effect. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned flow, since the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed, the player is always required to hit right-handed even after the V-winning occurs before the V-large winning opening is opened. Can be prompted. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right. In addition, when an electric power failure occurs while the image display corresponding to the large right-handed suggestion effect and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the effect is supported by aiming at V. In both cases when a power failure occurs while the image display and the image display corresponding to the small right-handed suggestion effect are performed and the power is restored from the power failure, the text image of "Recovering ..." and the small image after the power is turned on. Since the image of the right-handed promotion effect is displayed, it is possible to at least urge the player to continue right-handed in the subsequent game even if a power failure occurs.

(2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. ,
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24 (for example, FIG. 11-24 (c25)). Including the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen shown in c1).
The guidance display means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the first guidance display and the first guidance display and during a predetermined period during a predetermined period during which a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for notifying the start of control of the advantageous state is being executed. The second guidance display is performed (for example, an image display corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect and an image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26)).
In the period after the predetermined period, while ending the first guidance display, the second guidance display is continued (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-39 (e1) to 11-46 (e21), a big hit. The part that does not display the image corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect during the round, but continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the second guidance display is continued (for example, after a big hit as shown in FIGS. 11-48 and 11-49). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect in the probabilistic state),
The second guide display is not affected by the background image switching display (for example, the fade-out and fade-in switching display) performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to 11-38 (d1). As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the portion where the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out).
The second guidance display is not affected by the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, the image display by the group notice effect) (for example, the image display by the group notice effect as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (g5)). The part that continues to display the image corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by).

Specifically, during the execution of the fanfare effect, the player is made to hit right in the subsequent games by executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect to emphasize the right-handed promotion. Make sure to recognize it, and during the subsequent big hit round, end the big right-handed promotion effect while continuing the small right-handed promotion effect as it is so as not to appeal to the player excessively right-handed. Can be done. In addition, the player can always be encouraged to hit right by continuously executing the small right-handed promotion effect even in the probability change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state is completed. Furthermore, after the big hit occurs, the switching display (fade out, fade in, etc.) that is performed when switching to the big hit round after the fanfare effect is executed does not affect the small right-handed promotion effect, and the big hit game state is Since the small right-handed promotion effect is not affected by the image display such as the group notice effect performed in the probable change state or the time-saving state after the end, the player can always be encouraged to hit right. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 11-25 to 11-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33, for displaying an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamps are turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with each other twice),
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24). ), The part that outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect),
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (c26) to 11-33 (c29). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (e1), after the start of the big hit round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce the effect during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
In a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the same as the specific display result. When this happens, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not output sound in the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in this embodiment, in this embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so that the sound is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed during the big hit round. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without receiving the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(3-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the fact that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 11-25 to 11-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means repeatedly repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33, for displaying an image corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part where the frame lamps are turned on in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with each other twice),
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-32 (c24). ), The part that outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect),
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the last guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, the second time as shown in FIGS. 11-32 (c26) to 11-33 (c29). When the frame lamp is lit in the large right-handed promotion effect, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After the control of the advantageous state is started, the sound corresponding to the advantageous state is output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-39 (e1), after the start of the big hit round, the speakers 8L and 8R produce the effect during the round. The part that outputs sound according to the mode),
The guidance means is in a state different from the advantageous state, and in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is displayed. When the specific display result is obtained, the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot per special figure 2, the frame lamp promotes a large right-handed strike. The part that does not light up according to the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, the right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting portion of the lamp by the frame lamp to the right, so that the player can make a more effective right-handed hit. Can be urged to. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the first frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, whereas the last (in this embodiment, in this embodiment). When the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp of the second time), the sound is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, so that the sound is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed during the big hit round. The player can smoothly hear the BGM during the jackpot round without receiving the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion to the BGM. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-1) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 11-25 to 11-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guide means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display after the light emitting means is turned off (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33, the light is turned off once and then hit to the right. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display corresponding to the promotion effect),
The sound output means
After the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission (for example, FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to FIG. As shown in 11-32 (c24), when the frame lamp is lit in the first large right-handed promotion effect, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect).
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the corresponding sound is not output (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous-chan jackpot per special figure 2, the speakers 8L and 8R are used to promote a large right-handed strike. The part that does not output sound in the corresponding manner).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting part of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Unlike the above, the large right-handed promotion effect is not executed, and the sound in the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to it is not output. Can be prevented from feeling annoying. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(4-2) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko) that can perform variable display and can control an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result. It is a game machine 1)
A launching means (for example, a ball striking handle 30) capable of launching a game medium (for example, a game ball) into the game area according to the operation of the player, and
A first flow path (for example, a path passing through the left side area of the game area) and a second flow path (for example, a path passing through the right side area of the game area) in which the game medium can flow down in the game area. Of these, a guidance display means (for example, for effect control) that uses an image display to urge the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path (for example, an image display urging the player to hit right). Processing to execute the right-handed promotion effect by the CPU 120)
Guidance means (for example,) that urges the player to emit the game medium toward the second flow path by moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means (for example, the frame right lamp 075F009R and the frame left lamp 075F009L). , The process of executing the right-handed suggestion effect by the frame lamp by the effect control CPU 120)
A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound is provided.
The guidance display includes a first guidance display (for example, an image display corresponding to a large right-handed promotion effect located in the center of the screen shown in FIG. 11-32 (c25)) and a second guidance display (for example, FIG. 11-24). (C1) is included in the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect located at the upper right of the screen).
As the first guide display, an image display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is performed in a manner emphasized more than the second guide display (for example, large right-handed promotion). The production uses an image display of characters and figures larger than the small right-handed promotion production),
The guidance display means is a name of the advantageous state that is a part of a start effect (for example, a fanfare effect) that notifies the start of control of the advantageous state after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. Before the display (for example, the display of the name image showing the name of the big hit game state) is completed, the second guidance display is performed (for example, the name of the big hit game state is shown as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1)). Before the display of the name image is completed, the image is displayed corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect), and after the name display of the advantageous state is completed, the first guidance display is performed (FIGS. 11-25 to 11-). As shown in 33, the part that displays the image corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect after the display of the name image indicating the name of the big hit game state is completed),
The guidance means
After turning off the light emitting means, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33, after the light is turned off once, it corresponds to a large right-handed promotion effect. The part that lights the frame lamp in an arch from the left side to the right side in conjunction with the image display),
After that, in a special state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player after the control of the advantageous state is completed, the display result of the variable display is the specific display. When the result is obtained, the guidance light is not emitted (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of a continuous chan jackpot around the special figure 2, the frame lamp responds to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light in the mode).

Specifically, after the big hit occurs, the player is first urged to hit the right side conservatively by executing the small right-handed promotion effect, and then the name image showing the name of the big hit game state is displayed. It is possible to make the player recognize that the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, after making the player aware that the big hit round will start, by notifying the player that he / she will hit right in a manner emphasized by the big right-handed promotion effect, the player is informed that he / she will hit right in the subsequent games. It can be surely recognized. In addition, while the large right-handed promotion effect is being executed, right-handed promotion is performed by moving the lighting part of the lamp to the right after the frame lamp is turned off once, so that it is easier to understand and more effective. You can encourage the player to hit right. Further, when the right-handed promotion is performed by the frame lamp, the sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion, thereby encouraging the player to right-handed by the sound. Can be done. In addition, in the probable change state or the time saving state after the big hit game state, if a continuous hit in the special figure 2 occurs, the right-handed hit is already promoted, so that the first hit in the special figure 1 is performed. Since the frame lamp is not lit in a manner corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect linked to the large right-handed promotion effect as in the above, the right-handed promotion is performed in a frequently emphasized manner. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed. As a result, it is possible to preferably execute the instruction to the player to hit right.

(5) The second guide display is displayed in a more emphasized manner than the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect.

Specifically, the image display in the large right-handed promotion effect shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33 has a larger character image than the display of the name image in the fanfare effect shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2). In addition, characters appear step by step, and the execution time is long, and they are displayed in an emphasized manner. This makes it possible to emphasize to the player that he is hitting right.

(6) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is not output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed in the middle.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the final guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, but the second time. Regarding the subsequent right-handed promotion, no sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R output sound in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. At the same time, no sound is output in conjunction with the promotion of right-handed hitting from the second time onward. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to the first right-handed promotion. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. Can be heard.

(7) The guidance means repeats the guidance light emission a plurality of times in conjunction with the first guidance display.
The sound output means
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the first guidance light emission.
Of the multiple times of the guidance light emission, the corresponding sound corresponding to the guidance light emission is output in conjunction with the guidance light emission being performed in the middle.
Of the plurality of times of the guidance light emission, when the final guidance light emission is performed, the corresponding sound is not output.

Specifically, among the right-handed promotion effects by the frame lamps over multiple times, the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effects is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the first right-handed promotion, and then to the right. The sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in conjunction with the striking promotion, but the sound corresponding to the right-handed promotion effect is not output from the speakers 8L and 8R for the final right-handed promotion. For example, when the right-handed promotion effect by the frame lamp is executed three times, the speakers 8L and 8R are linked to the first and second right-handed promotion based on the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect. Sound is output and no sound is output in conjunction with the third right-handed promotion. That is, the sound data for the right-handed promotion effect includes only the sound data linked to each of the first and second right-handed promotion. Note that the sound data includes only sound data linked to one right-handed promotion, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute two loops of sound data linked to one right-handed promotion. .. Alternatively, the sound data may include sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice, and the effect control CPU 120 may execute the sound data linked to the promotion of right-handed hitting twice. .. As a result, the BGM in the big hit round, which is output after the big right-handed promotion effect is executed, is not affected by the sound of the mode corresponding to the right-handed promotion, and the BGM in the big hit round is smoothly given to the player. Can be heard.

(8) The light emitting means is composed of a plurality of lamps, and after turning off all of the plurality of lamps, the guide light is emitted in conjunction with the first guide display (for example, FIG. 11-25 (c3)). As shown in the above, after turning off all the lamps of the frame lamp, the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect).

Specifically, since all the lamps of the frame lamps are turned off once and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, the player is encouraged to strike right-handed more easily and effectively. Can be done.

(9) The light emitting means emits the guide light in conjunction with the first guide display based on the data defined by the lighting data table.
The lighting data table includes a parent table (for example, the parent table shown in FIGS. 11-34) that defines the execution time of the guidance emission, and a child table (for example, a child table) that indicates a grandchild table in which the data referred to by the light emitting means is defined. , The child table shown in FIG. 11-35) and the grandchild table (for example, the child table shown in FIGS. 11-36 and 11-37).

Specifically, the game effect lamp 9 including the frame lamp specifies the execution time of the large right-handed promotion effect by referring to the parent table, and the grandchild table in which the lighting data is defined by referring to the child table. Turn on / blink / turn off by specifying and referring to the grandchild table. As a result, the game effect lamp 9 can be efficiently turned on in an appropriate lighting mode.

(10) Among the light emitting means, the grandchild table corresponding to the light emitting means that does not perform the guided light emitting is not specified in the child table.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-35, the lower left lamp 075F009D, the upper lamp 075F009U of the attacker, and the left lamp 075F009E of the board are turned off without being used in the large right-handed promotion effect, so that a grandchild table is provided. Absent. As a result, the amount of lighting data used in the ROM 121 can be reduced as much as possible.

(11) The guide means emits the guide light by sequentially moving the light emitting points of the light emitting means in the direction in which the player launches the game medium (for example, FIGS. 11-25 to 11-). A portion in which each lamp included in the frame lamp is turned on in order from the left side to the right side of the game area as shown in 33).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 to 11-33, by turning on each lamp included in the frame lamps in order from the left side to the right side of the game area, a large right-handed promotion effect is executed. By doing so, it is possible to encourage the player to hit right in an easy-to-understand manner.

(12) The guide means emits the guide light while changing the light emission color of the light emitting means (for example, a portion for lighting the frame lamp in seven colors).

Specifically, since the frame lamp executes the large right-handed promotion effect while being lit in seven colors, it is possible to more effectively encourage the player to right-handed.

(13) The second guide display is not affected by the fade-in and fade-out switching display as the background image switching display performed in connection with the control of the advantageous state (for example, FIG. 11-38 (d1)). -As shown in FIG. 11-39 (d4), the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect is continued without being affected by the switching display of the background image due to the fade-in and fade-out).

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to 11-39 (d4), the small right-handed promotion effect switches the background image by fading in and out when switching from the fanfare effect to the big hit round. Continues without being affected by the display. As a result, even if the fanfare effect is switched to the big hit round by the switching display of the background image, the player can be urged to continue to hit right.

(14) The second guide display is not affected by the display in the notice effect that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result as the display of the effect image in the special state (for example, FIG. 11). As shown in −49 (g5), the part that continues the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect without being affected by the image display by the group notice effect).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), the small right-handed promotion effect affects the display in the advance notice effect that suggests that a big hit will occur in the probable change state after the big hit advantageous state ends. Continued without being done. As a result, even if the visibility of the decorative pattern becomes difficult due to the execution of the advance notice effect, the arrow image and the character image in the small right-handed promotion effect continue to be displayed without impairing the visibility. You can encourage the player to hit right.

(15) In the special state, when the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the corresponding sound is not output and the guidance light emission is not performed (for example, shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2)). As described above, in the case of continuous chan per special figure 2, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the frame lamp is in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. The part that does not light up).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as in the case of the first hit. Does not output sound with, or the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed by promoting right-handed striking in a manner of frequently emphasizing.

[Modification example of feature section 075F]
A modified example of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature portion 075F described above will be described.

(About turning off the lights before executing the big right-handed promotion effect)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (c3), all the lamps of the frame lamps are once turned off, and then the frame lamps are turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. , Not limited to turning off all the lamps, some lamps may be turned on. For example, the lamp that is lit first in the large right-handed promotion effect (in this example, the fourth lamp of the frame left lamp 075F009L) may be lit. In this way, it is possible to clearly show the connection when the frame lamp is turned on in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

(About switching display during big hit round)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-38 (d1) to 11-39 (d4), as a switching display during the jackpot round, when switching from the fanfare effect to the jackpot round, fade-in and fade-out are performed. Although the example of executing the switching display of the background image is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the switching display during the jackpot round, an effect such as a whiteout in which a pure white screen is inserted between the fanfare effect and the jackpot round, or a blackout in which a pure black screen is inserted may be used.

Further, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a BGM selection screen for selecting a BGM (musical piece) may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the BGM selected by the BGM selection screen may be displayed.

Further, as the switching display during the jackpot round, a mode selection screen for selecting the effect mode may be displayed, and the background image corresponding to the mode selected by the mode selection screen may be displayed.

In either case, even if a special switching display is performed during the big hit round, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the display of the production image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (g5), as the display of the effect image in the probable change state after the big hit game ball state, the image display by the group notice effect is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the display of the effect image in the probabilistic state after the jackpot game ball state, a whiteout effect of inserting a pure white screen during the reach effect or a blackout effect effect of inserting a pure black screen may be used. You may use the effect of the pseudo-continuous notice that repeats the fluctuation and temporary stop of the decorative pattern multiple times, or it is difficult to see the decorative pattern by lighting or blinking the light guide plate provided on the front side of the game area. You may use the effect to make it. In either case, even if a special effect display is performed in the probability change state after the big hit game ball state, the image display corresponding to the small right-handed promotion effect may not be affected.

(About the production aiming at V)
In this embodiment, as a specific area, the detection area of the V winning switch 075F024 after passing through the V large winning opening provided inside the special variable winning ball device 075F007B is illustrated, and V is aimed at as an effect. As shown in FIG. 11-43 (e13), an image pointing to the V grand prize opening was displayed. However, not limited to this, the image display in the production aiming at V, which is the third guide display using the image display related to a specific area, is not limited to the one that points to the V big winning opening itself, but the one that points to the vicinity of the V big winning opening. It may also point to a route leading to the V-large winning opening, for example, a lid portion for opening and closing the V-large winning opening located on the upstream side of the V-large winning opening.

(About the big right-handed promotion production)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-31 (c23), the graphic image of the arrow appears first, and then the character image of "Right-handed !!" appears. It was, but it is not limited to this. For example, the character image of "Right-handed !!" may appear first, and then the graphic image of the arrow may appear. Further, the image display of the large right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the first guidance display, is composed of an arrow image and a character image, whereas the image display of the small right-handed promotion effect, which is an example of the second guidance display. Then, it may be composed of only an arrow image or only a character image.

(About advantageous condition)
In this embodiment, the period of the "advantageous state" is the period shown in FIGS. 11-24 (c1) to 11-47 (f4) (the period from t3 in FIG. 11-20 to t16 in FIG. 11-21). ), But it is not limited to this. For example, the period of the "advantageous state" is a period excluding the fanfare production period, that is, a period shown in FIGS. 11-39 (d3) to 11-47 (f4) (t4 to 11-21 in FIG. 11-20). (Period up to t16). Further, the fanfare effect and the big right-handed promotion effect may be executed during the period in which the symbol in which the big hit occurs is determined (symbol determination period).

(About right-handed promotion production in the case of the first hit)
In this embodiment, in the case of a big hit per special figure 1, the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, or the frame lamp is a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. It was lit with, but it is not limited to this. For example, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of big hit per special figure 1. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the jackpot per special figure 1 is a probabilistic jackpot, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R respond to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output depending on the mode. Further, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R make a sound in the manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. May not be output.

(Regarding the right-handed promotion effect in the case of consecutive chans per special figure 2)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-50 (h2), in the case of continuous chan hits per special figure 2, sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. Or, the frame lamp does not light in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the frame lamp may be lit in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R may not output sound in a mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect.

Further, the mode of the large right-handed promotion effect of the speakers 8L, 8R and the frame lamp may be different depending on the type of continuous chan per special figure 2. For example, when the big hit per special figure 1 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, while the speakers 8L and 8R sound in a manner corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect. When the continuous chan hit in Special Figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, the frame lamp lights up in a manner corresponding to the big right-handed promotion effect, and the speakers 8L and 8R change to the large right-handed promotion effect. Sound may be output in a corresponding manner. Further, when the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a normal big hit, the frame lamp does not light in the mode corresponding to the large right-handed promotion effect, and the speaker 8L, 8R responds to the large right-handed promotion effect. You may not output the sound with. When the continuous chan hit in the special figure 2 is a probabilistic big hit, unlike the first hit in the special figure 1, the frame lamp has a special mode (for example, gold or seven colors, etc.) according to the large right-handed promotion effect. ), Or the sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a special manner according to the large right-handed promotion effect. Further, on the screen of the image display device 5, a large right-handed promotion effect may be executed in a special mode (for example, a special character appears) different from the first hit in the special figure 1. ..

(About the 3rd guidance display)
In this embodiment, as the third guidance display using the image display relating to the specific area, an image pointing to the V big winning opening during the big hit round in the probability variation big hit is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as the third guidance display, an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the second start winning opening in the probabilistic state after the jackpot game state ends, or a variable winning ball It may be applied to display an image prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). For example, after the ending effect is completed, the effect control CPU 120 receives a hold storage number specification command (C2 system command), a background specification command (95 system command), a symbol variation specification command (8D system command), and a display result from the CPU 103. Based on the reception of the designated command (8C series command) and the fluctuation pattern designation command (81 series command), "Aim!" With an arrow image pointing to the second start winning opening and the variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory). The character image of "" may be displayed on the image display device 5. Even if such an image display is performed, the graphic and character images in the small right-handed promotion effect may be continuously displayed.

(Regarding the control of the time saving state by displaying the lost symbol)
In each of the above-mentioned feature parts and modified examples, the transition to the time saving state (high base state) always goes through the big hit state or the small hit state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 075F007A operates. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed as a special symbol, the special variable winning ball device 7 or the special variable winning ball device 7 is illustrated. It is also possible to shift to the time saving state (high base state) without operating 075F007A.

As the above-mentioned time-saving symbols, these time-saving symbols may be a part of the lost symbol or a part of the small hit symbol.

In addition, when performing a lottery process related to the derivation display of the time-saving symbol, the lottery may be executed by using a dedicated random number for the time-saving symbol lottery in these lottery processes, or the lottery random number of the lost symbol or the big hit symbol. The lottery may be performed using other lottery random numbers such as the lottery random number of the above, the lottery random number of the small hit symbol, the random number for determining the big hit lottery, and the lottery random number of the fall lottery.

Further, these time-saving symbols may be a plurality of types of symbols, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as a small hit symbol or a combination of symbols displayed as a lost symbol. In this case, it may be determined whether or not the time saving state is changed depending on the small hit symbol used together. However, if the time-saving symbol is won, the lottery will not be used to draw a lottery to determine whether or not there is a transition to the time-saving state, and the number of time-savings will not be drawn.

Further, in the case of drawing a time-saving symbol and the set value can be changed, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol does not change according to the set value, that is, the lottery probability of the time-saving symbol in all the set values. Is the same, but the lottery probabilities of these time-saving symbols may be different between the first special figure and the second special figure.

In addition, regarding the timing of random number acquisition when performing a lottery of time-saving symbols, regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used, the starting port (first starting winning opening, It may be at the time of winning the second start winning opening).

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol is drawn, when using a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number), the lottery result by the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used as the winning value, and the small hit symbol is used for the time-saving symbol lottery. When a random number is used, a specific small hit symbol random number value can be used as the winning value, and when a random number for the fall lottery judgment value is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value can be used as the winning value. A lottery using the above, for example, a time saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time saving symbol may be won when the game ball passes through the time saving area.

In addition, in the case where the lottery of the time saving symbol is performed using the structure, when the small hit symbol also uses the time saving symbol, the variable display number (time saving number) of the time saving state does not change depending on the presence or absence of passing through the time saving area. To.

In addition, regarding the winning when the time-saving symbol lottery is performed, when the lost symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, a specific lost symbol random number value is used as the winning value, and when the jackpot symbol random number is used for the time-saving symbol lottery, it is specified. The jackpot symbol random number value can be used as the winning value. However, when these random values are used as winning values, performances other than the jackpot probability differ depending on the settings, so it is possible only if the set values cannot be changed.

Further, the determination timing of the lottery result of the time-saving symbol may be executed at the timing after the jackpot determination. In addition, the lottery of the time saving symbol is not executed in the time saving state (high base) or the high probability time regardless of the random number value used for the lottery, and is executed only in the low probability low base state. .. However, if the time saving symbol is derived and displayed in the state where the time saving state has already been set, even if the time saving number of times is reset or the lottery is not performed, it may be determined for each gaming machine.

Further, regarding the number of time reductions when the time reduction symbol is derived and displayed, it is possible to have a plurality of predetermined number of time reductions according to the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, it is possible to make the conditions for granting the time reduction different for each time saving symbol.

Further, when the number of time reductions differs depending on the time reduction symbol, the time reduction symbol distribution lottery can be changed between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

Further, even when the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time saving times given may be different depending on the game state at that time. However, it is necessary that the game state is predetermined.

In addition, the lottery result of "0 times of time saving" can be included as the lottery result of the time saving symbol in the low probability low base state.

Further, the time reduction end symbol lottery (time reduction end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time reductions may be set to the number of times until the time reduction end symbol is derived and displayed after the time reduction start, or until the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. That is, in principle, the number of time reductions may not be set and may be unlimited.

Further, the number of time reductions and the granting condition may be different between the time reduction state controlled by the time reduction symbol and the time reduction state controlled by the occurrence of a big hit.

Further, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing of being controlled to the time-saving state is the time when the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, in the case where the small hit symbol random number is used for the lottery of the time saving symbol, when the small hit is won and the time saving state is entered, the end time of the small hit operation is controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in the case of a lottery using the structure, the timing controlled to the time saving state is the timing at the end of the operation of the structure in the gaming state (for example, the small hit state) in which the structure is operated.

Further, in the case of a gaming machine (so-called specified number of probability change machines (ST machines)) that is controlled to a high probability low base state over a predetermined variable display number after a big hit, the high probability low base state is reached when the game hall is opened. Therefore, the high-probability low-base state may be controlled to a time-saving state after the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed and ended.

In addition, when the time saving limiter function is installed and the time saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of times of the time saving limiter is updated. Further, the symbol confirmation time of the time-saving symbol may be set to a time different from the symbol confirmation time of other symbols.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the feature unit 075F, in order for the gaming state to be controlled to the time saving state, it always goes through the big hit gaming state, so that the player is encouraged to hit right in the time saving state. It was possible to perform the big right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect during the fanfare production that is executed when a big hit occurs. However, when the lost symbol as described above is used as a time-saving symbol, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state without going through the jackpot gaming state. Therefore, when the lost symbol is displayed as an opportunity to control the time-saving state, the loss is lost. It is necessary to secure a time for executing the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect between the time when the symbol is displayed and the time when the time is controlled to be shortened. Therefore, the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right-handed promotion effect may be executed by the following methods.

For example, when the symbol confirmation time until the fluctuation of the lost symbol that is not the time-saving symbol stops is 0.5 seconds, the symbol confirmation time until the lost symbol that is the time-saving symbol stops is set to 30 seconds, which is longer than that. In the meantime, a time-saving fanfare effect may be executed to notify the start of control in the time-saving state. In addition, in the display result specification command (8C system command), the CPU 103 is a command for specifying a loss, in addition to a display result specification command indicating a normal loss variation in which a time reduction is not given, a loss variation for a time reduction in which a time reduction is given. A display result designation command indicating the above may be prepared, and the effect control command may be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 by properly using both commands depending on whether or not the time saving symbol is lost. Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the symbol confirmation time to 0.5 seconds when it receives the display result designation command indicating the normal loss fluctuation, and sets the symbol confirmation time when it receives the display result designation command indicating the loss fluctuation for shortening the time. May be 30 seconds.

The effect control CPU 120 displays a name image (for example, “time saving RUSH”) indicating the name of the time saving state on the image display device 5 in 30 seconds of the symbol confirmation time, and controls the time saving state from the speakers 8L and 8R. The sound is output in the corresponding mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in the mode corresponding to the control of the time saving state. A part of the time-saving fanfare effect can be made to correspond to a part of the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2).

Then, as in the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1), an image (for example, "O") congratulating the time saving state even before the name image ("time saving RUSH") produced by the time saving fanfare effect is displayed. The text image of "Medeto !!") is displayed on the image display device 5, the sound for congratulating the time saving state is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting for congratulating the time saving state. The lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9 may be changed so as to be a mode. In addition, as a small right-handed promotion effect, a small right-handed promotion effect is executed in which an image consisting of a figure (arrow indicating the right direction) and a character (character of "right-handed") is displayed small in the upper right corner of the image display device 5. The right-handed sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting mode of the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 may be changed to a right-handed display (lighting). The image in the small right-handed promotion effect displayed on the upper right of the image display device 5 and the lighting by the right-handed display unit 075F030 and the right-handed display unit 075F055 start at the same timing and end at the same timing. That is, both are urging the player to hit right for the same period.

After that, as in the example shown in FIG. 11-24 (c2), the small right-handed promotion effect is continuously executed while the name image (“time-saving RUSH”) produced by the time-saving fanfare effect is displayed, and then FIG. 11-25. After turning off the game effect lamp 9 once as in the example shown in (c3), a large right-handed strike is promoted during the time-saving fanfare production as in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-25 (c4) to 11-38 (c26). You may perform the production. During this time, the small right-handed promotion effect continues to be executed. Then, after executing the large right-handed promotion effect, the game state may be controlled to a time-saving state and the small right-handed promotion effect may be continued as in the examples shown in FIGS. 11-48 to 11-50.

In this way, even when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, by securing a symbol confirmation time longer than the symbol confirmation time of the lost symbol that is not the time reduction symbol, the symbol confirmation time is greatly increased. It is possible to execute a striking promotion effect and a small right-handed striking promotion effect.

In addition, when the time is controlled to be shortened by the loss symbol, the time reduction is not limited to the one that executes the large right-handed promotion effect or the small right-handed promotion effect by using the symbol confirmation time as described above. If there is a hold memory corresponding to the loss for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the design is fixed, in the next game (variation), the time saving fanfare effect is executed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small right are performed. You may perform a striking promotion effect. Specifically, if the next game (fluctuation) of the game in which the loss pattern is confirmed is a loss change, instead of performing a production that expects a hit such as a reach effect or a notice effect, a time-saving fanfare effect is performed. At the same time, a large right-handed promotion effect or a small right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, if the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol is confirmed is a big hit, then the fanfare effect as shown in FIG. 11-24 (c1) is executed, so that the time-saving fanfare effect is not executed.

On the other hand, if there is no hold memory for performing the next game (variation) of the game in which the lost symbol of the time saving grant is confirmed, the time saving fanfare effect is executed while the symbol is not changed, and the large right-handed promotion effect and the small A right-handed promotion effect may be executed. However, in this case, the customer waiting demo designation command (9F command) is not transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control CPU 120 so that the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed and the time saving fanfare effect is not hindered. .. Alternatively, even if the customer waiting demo designation command (9F system command) is received from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 may execute the time saving fanfare effect without executing the customer waiting demonstration effect.

(Explanation related to the association of feature parts)
Each configuration relating to the feature portion may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration relating to the other feature portion. The feature portions thus combined or the individual feature portions that are not combined may be appropriately combined with a part or all of each configuration related to the other feature portions.

It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 game board, 3 game machine frame, 4A 1st special symbol display device, 4B 2nd special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R decorative symbol display area, 6A winning ball device , 6B variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R speaker, 9 game effect lamp, 10 general winning opening, 11 main board, 12 production control board, 13 voice control board, 14 lamp control board, 15 relay Board, 21 gate switch, 22A 1st start port switch, 22B 2nd start port switch, 23 count switch, 25A 1st hold indicator, 25B 2nd hold indicator, 25C normal figure hold indicator, 30 hitting operation handle, 31A stick controller, 31B push button, 32 movable body, 35A controller sensor unit, 35B push sensor, 41 passage gate, 81,82 solenoid, 100 game control microcomputer, 101,121 ROM, 102,122 RAM, 104,124 Random circuit, 106 RTC, 110 switch circuit, 111 output circuit, 123 display control unit

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result.
Movable body provided to operate and
A specific effect that notifies the effect result by operating the movable body, and a suggestion effect that suggests that the specific effect is executed by repeatedly operating the movable body before the specific effect is executed. And, the production execution means that can execute,
With
The effect executing means is
When the suggestion effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is not displayed, while when the specific effect is executed, the effect image for the movable body is displayed.
A specific image is displayed while the suggestion effect is being executed, and the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed.
When the specific image is gradually enlarged and displayed, the effect image for the specific image can be displayed.
The specific image includes a first specific image and a second specific image different from the first specific image, and is in an advantageous state when the first specific image is displayed and when the second specific image is displayed. The rate of control is different,
The control cycle of the movable body by the effect executing means is different from the update cycle of the specific image and the effect image.
The enlargement speed in the enlarged display differs between the first timing in the enlarged display and the second timing after the first timing.
The operating speed of the movable body in the suggestion effect is the same at the first timing and the second timing.
further,
A launching means that can launch a game medium into the game area according to the player's operation,
Of the first flow path and the second flow path through which the game medium can flow in the game area, a guidance display for prompting the player to launch the game medium toward the second flow path is displayed using an image display. Equipped with guidance display means to perform
The guidance display includes a first guidance display and a second guidance display.
The guidance display means
In a predetermined period after the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result, the name display of the advantageous state, which is a part of the start effect for notifying the start of the control of the advantageous state, is completed. The second guidance display is performed, and after the completion of the name display of the advantageous state, the first guidance display is performed and the second guidance display is continued.
In the period after the predetermined period, the first guidance display is terminated while the second guidance display is continued.
A gaming machine that continues the second guidance display in a special state after the control of the advantageous state is completed.

Images